Sei sulla pagina 1di 582

V5.

cover

Front cover

Introduction to IBM i for New


Users
(Course code OE98)

Instructor Guide
ERC 10.0

Instructor Guide

Trademarks
IBM and the IBM logo are registered trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation, registered in
many jurisdictions worldwide:
AIX
Domino
Lotus
OfficeVision
POWER
POWER7
System i

AS/400
i5/OS
Netfinity
Operating System/400
POWER5
Power Systems

DB2
Lotus Notes
Notes
OS/400
POWER6
Redbooks

Adobe is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in


the United States, and/or other countries.
Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in
the United States and other countries.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
in the United States, other countries, or both.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or
both.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or
both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.

August 2010 edition


The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is distributed on an as is basis without
any warranty either express or implied. The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a customer
responsibility and depends on the customers ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customers operational environment. While
each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in a specific situation, there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will
result elsewhere. Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk.

Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1996, 2010.


This document may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.
Note to U.S. Government Users Documentation related to restricted rights Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

V5.4.0.1
Instructor Guide

TOC

Contents
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Instructor course overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Course description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Topic 1.1: Introduction to the IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
What is the IBM i? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
IBM i expands on a rich heritage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Innovative i technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
IBM i operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Applications (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Applications (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Standard interface: Display session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
What is System i Navigator? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Management Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
IBM Systems Director Navigator for i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
How does Director Navigator for i compare to System i Navigator? . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Topic 1.2: Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Reference: IBM i homepage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Reference: IBM Systems Information Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Information Center: Basic operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
IBM Redbooks: System i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Unit 2. Signing on and off the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Topic 2.1:Using 5250 emulation interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
The Sign On display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Your password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
IBM i Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Accessing Operational Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Signing off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
The keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Engraved function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
The Enter key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Page Up and Page Down keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Error Reset key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

iii

Instructor Guide

The Print key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27


Field Exit key: A little more than tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Numbered function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Topic 2.2:Using System i Navigator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Sign on to System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Basic operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Topic 2.3:Using Systems Director Navigator for i interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Enter the following URL into a browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
User verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Welcome page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Basic operations page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Checkpoint (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Checkpoint (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Checkpoint (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Unit 3. Using supported interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Topic 3.1: Using 5250 green screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
User menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Using the message line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Let's practice menu navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Using GO command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
A special menu: System Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Entry display example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
List display example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Select the assistance level: F21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Topic 3.2: Using System i Navigator panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
General navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
General navigation: Window view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Context-sensitive menu for system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Using the Include function (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Using the Include function (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Using the Columns function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Topic 3.3: Using Systems Director Navigator for i pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
What is included? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
New controls overview (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
New controls overview (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
New controls overview: Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Basic operations tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50
Include function for messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
Columns function for jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58
Exercises 1: Signing on to the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60
iv

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4.0.1
Instructor Guide

TOC

Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62


Unit 4. Using online help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Topic 4.1: Using display session help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Using online information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Extended help information for a display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Accessing help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Field help: Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Field help: Entry displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Field help: List displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Information Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Topic 4.2: Using System i Navigator help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Help: What can I do with? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
IBM i Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Click the Help button for full screen help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Click the ? for specific help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Topic 4.3: Using Systems Director Navigator for i help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Learn how to use help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Help: About console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Click ? for help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Setting startup pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Click the twistie for pop-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Unit 5. Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Topic 5.1: Messaging concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Types of messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
What is a message queue? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Where do messages come from? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Topic 5.2: Working with messages on a display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
The Messages menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Send a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Receiving messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Message line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Break messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Work with Messages display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Replying to an inquiry message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Replying to system messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Deleting messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Message delivery modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Topic 5.3: Working with messages through System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Work with messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Message: Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

Instructor Guide

Send a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45


Displaying system operator messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Topic 5.4: Working with messages through Systems Director Navigator for i . . . .5-49
Work with messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Message: Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
Send a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55
Displaying system operator messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-57
Checkpoint (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-59
Checkpoint (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61
Checkpoint (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-63
Exercise 2: Online help and messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-65
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67
Unit 6. Using CL commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Topic 6.1: Using CL commands through a display session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Where to find commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
CL structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
More on values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Required and optional parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Where to enter a CL command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
The Command Entry display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Entering commands using prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
CRTLIB command prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
Entering commands in free format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Keywords are optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
Topic 6.2: Using CL commands through System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Verify Management Central server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31
Running a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Entering a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35
Submitting the command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Task Activity: Run Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Finding a command (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41
Finding a command (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
Topic 6.3: Using CL commands through Systems Director Navigator for i . . . . . . .6-45
Running a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-47
Enter command: Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49
Entering a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51
Checkpoint (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53
Checkpoint (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55
Checkpoint (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
Exercise 3: Command entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-59
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-61
Unit 7. Managing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Topic 7.1:Managing objects through a display session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
vi

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4.0.1
Instructor Guide

TOC

What are objects? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6


Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Simple name versus qualified name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Library list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Finding an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Locating an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Topic 7.2: Managing objects through System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
File Systems: Integrated File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Integrated File System: QSYS.LIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Menu options for different object types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Topic 7.3: Managing objects through Systems Director Navigator for i . . . . . . . . 7-29
File systems: Integrated File System QSYS.LIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Find and open your library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Menu options for different object types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Checkpoint (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Checkpoint (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Checkpoint (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Exercise 4: Object management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Unit 8. Managing your work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Topic 8.1: Managing your work through a display session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Types of work on the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Batch jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Work with User Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Work with user job options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Controlling Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Controlling printer output with WRKSPLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Change a spool file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Topic 8.2: Managing work through System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Basic Operations: Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Work Management: Active Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Active Jobs: Customize and Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Basic Operations: Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Basic Operations: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Open a spool file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Spool file: Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Spool file: Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Spool file: Copy and paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Spool file: Drag and drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Topic 8.3: Managing work through Systems Director Navigator for i . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Basic Operations: User Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Work Management: Active Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Active Jobs: Customize and include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Basic Operations: Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Basic Operations: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Open a spool file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

vii

Instructor Guide

Spool file: Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-63


Spool file: Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-66
Checkpoint (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-68
Checkpoint (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-70
Checkpoint (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-72
Exercise 5: Tracking jobs and printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-74
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-76
Unit 9. Security overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Topic 9.1: Security concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
System tools used to secure your system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
User profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
User classes and what they can do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Assistance levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
What authorization can be specified for an object? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Where is object authorization specified? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Topic 9.2: Security changes a user can make . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Changing your password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Changing your profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Assistance level parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Connection to server: Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
System tasks: Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Unit 10. Additional education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
IBM Web site for education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Power Systems Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
IBM i Training paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
IBM i system operator roadmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Class evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Thank you . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
Appendix A. Menus for system operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Appendix B. Commonly used commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

viii

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

TMK

Trademarks
The reader should recognize that the following terms, which appear in the content of this
training document, are official trademarks of IBM or other companies:
IBM and the IBM logo are registered trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation, registered in
many jurisdictions worldwide:
AIX
Domino
Lotus
OfficeVision
POWER
POWER7
System i

AS/400
i5/OS
Netfinity
Operating System/400
POWER5
Power Systems

DB2
Lotus Notes
Notes
OS/400
POWER6
Redbooks

Adobe is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in


the United States, and/or other countries.
Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in
the United States and other countries.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
in the United States, other countries, or both.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or
both.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or
both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Trademarks

ix

Instructor Guide

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

pref

Instructor course overview


This course enables the students to acquire the skills necessary to be
productive users on the Power i System.

Course strategy
Teaching strategy
Each classroom session uses a combination of facilitated lecture,
discussions, group exercises, and demonstrations to convey the
material.
Introduce the material
Inform the students of the objectives of the unit and topic. Give them a
brief scenario that will help them understand how the presented
material will assist them in performing their jobs.
Facilitate the learning experience
Involve the students in the learning process. Ask them questions and
present classroom scenarios in which students use the available
resources to solve situations involving process, procedure, or content
on the job.
Review the material
Review objectives at the conclusion of each unit to ensure that the
students have a thorough understanding of the material.
Group exercises and labs are used to reinforce knowledge and skills
that the students have learned in the previous classroom topics. The
instructor serves as a mentor in checking results, answering
questions, and providing constructive feedback and evaluation.
Course evaluation
Evaluation measures the quality, effectiveness, and impact of the
course. It enables students to answer the question, "Are the
requirements and objectives of the course being met?"
For all classes, students will provide feedback on course quality by
completing an end-of-course questionnaire.
Measurement plan
There are no formal tests administered in the class.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Instructor course overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

xi

Instructor Guide

Course materials

Student Notebook
Instructor Guide
PowerPoint visuals in PDF form to be displayed
Student Exercises
Instructor Exercises Guide

Summary of changes in this edition


This course has been updated to IBM i V7R1.
All screen captures were updated to reflect how the screens look at
V7R1.
All of the units have been updated to now include support for Systems
i Navigator for i.
The units teach how to perform functions using a display emulation
session, System i Navigator, and Systems Director Navigator for i.

xii

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

pref

Course description
Introduction to IBM i for New Users
Duration: 1 day
Purpose
In this classroom course, you will learn basic concepts and skills you
need to be productive users on the IBM i. With plenty of hands-on
labs, we show everything from signing to the available user interfaces;
green screen environment, System i Navigator and Systems Director
Navigator for i. You will learn how objects are managed on the system
and how you display these objects. You will learn to use Control
Language (CL) commands (fast path) and how to work with and
manage messages on the system. We will also address how to the
system manages work and how you manage your printouts. We will
also provide a basic overview of security.

Audience
This course is intended for new end users employed in a data
processing environment who are new to the IBM i server.

Prerequisites
None.

Objectives
After completing this course, you should be able to:
Explain the purpose of the IBM i operating systems
Explain IBM i models and generations
Explain which applications are supported
Sign on and off the system from a display station, System i
Navigator, and Systems Director Navigator for i
Use the display station keyboard
Use the online help that is available
Use the different interfaces available on the system
Understand how objects are managed on the system

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Course description

xiii

Instructor Guide

Enter control language (CL) commands


Send and receive messages and work with message queues
Manage work and output
Explain basic security

xiv

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

pref

Agenda
Day 1
(00:30) Welcome
(00:10) Unit 1 - Introduction and overview to IBM i
(00:45) Unit 2 - Signing on and off the system
(00:45) Unit 3 - Using supported interfaces
(00:30) Unit 4 - Using online help
(00:30) Unit 5 - Messages
(00:45) Unit 6 - Using CL commands
(00:30) Unit 7 - Managing objects
(00:30) Unit 8 - Managing your work
(00:30) Unit 9 - Security overview
(00:10) Unit 10 - Additional education

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Agenda

xv

Instructor Guide

xvi

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i


Estimated time
00:10

What this unit is about


This unit provides a high level overview and introduction to the IBM i.

What you should be able to do


After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Describe what is included within the IBM i operating system
Describe the history of the IBM i
List the supported user interfaces
Describe the difference between System i Navigator and Systems
Director Navigator for i
List Web sites that contain reference materials for IBM i

How You Will Check Your Progress


Checkpoint questions

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-1

Instructor Guide

Unit objectives
IBM i

After completing this course, you should be able to:


Describe what is included within the IBM i operating system
Describe the history of the IBM i
List the supported user interfaces
Describe the difference between System i Navigator and
Systems Director Navigator for i
List Web sites that contain reference materials for IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-1. Unit objectives

OE9810.0

Notes:

1-2

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-3

Instructor Guide

Topic 1.1: Introduction


to the IBM i

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 1-2. Topic 1.1: Introduction to the IBM i

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

1-4

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-5

Instructor Guide

What is the IBM i?


IBM i

The world's most popular multiuser business


computing system
Sold in more than 120 countries
Enabled in 40 national languages
Installed in 98% of Fortune 100 companies

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-3. What is the IBM i?

OE9810.0

Notes:

1-6

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-7

Instructor Guide

IBM i expands on a rich heritage


IBM i

AS/400e
iSeries

eServer i5

AS/400
IBM i
A technology-friendly
architecture supporting
continuous innovation
without disruption

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-4. IBM i expands on a rich heritage

OE9810.0

Notes:
Twenty years ago IBM introduced the AS/400, bringing together two of IBM's most
successful platforms of the time: S/36 and S/38. It was the first of a new generation of
servers with a revolutionary virtualized operating system. It allowed companies to simply
write business applications that exploited its integrated database.
In 1995, we moved to 64-bit technology. Then, in 2000, we delivered Linux for POWER,
extending the platform to open applications. In 2004, we delivered POWER5 and support
for AIX. In 2007, we delivered POWER6 with the i570. Finally, in 2010 we started our rollout
of the current POWER7 platform.

1-8

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-9

Instructor Guide

Innovative i technology
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-5. Innovative i technology

OE9810.0

Notes:
We have had innovative technology built into the IBM i throughout its life cycle. Here are
some of them. These are the things that make our operating system better than the other
operating systems out there.
The IBM i server delivers tremendous capacity growth in its product line. The IBM i Layer,
also known as Technology Independent Machine Interface (TIMI), has made it possible to
completely change the underlying hardware with minimum, if any, impact to IBM i
applications.
TIMI allows the system to incorporate significant new hardware technology quickly and
transparently. The ease with which customers have migrated to these powerful systems is
a testimony to the fundamental strength of the servers architecture.

1-10 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-11

Instructor Guide

IBM i operating system


IBM i

IBM i operating system attributes include:


Conceived as a single entity
Some of the highlights:
Ease of installation and use
Database support, DB2 IBM i
Control language (CL)
Comprehensive security to all system resources

Productive application development environment


System availability
Electronic customer support
Support for central site maintenance
Connectivity to remote devices, systems, and networks

Support for PC connectivity


GUI support through System i Navigator and Systems Director Navigator for i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-6. IBM i operating system

OE9810.0

Notes:
The IBM i Operating System is conceived as a single entity. This means that facilities, such
as relational database, communications, networking capabilities, online help are fully
integrated into the operating system and the machine.
The user communicates with all components of IBM i using a single command language
(Control Language or CL).

1-12 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-13

Instructor Guide

Applications (1 of 2)
IBM i

Client Server solutions:


IBM i eServer supports thousands of client/server applications.

e-business: The time is now


What does it mean to be an e-business? Yesterday, it meant posting
information about your company on the Web and connecting your
employees through e-mail. Today it means much more.

Domino for IBM i:


Now you can combine the strengths of IBM i and Lotus Domino to position
your organization for the 21st century. Use Domino to enhance existing
business applications and reach new levels of collaboration and coordination
in your organization. Use Domino to create, deploy, and manage e-business
solutions on a server known for reliability, salability, and integrated security.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-7. Applications (1 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:
Access for Windows allows you to connect a personal computer (PC) to an IBM i server
over a local area network (LAN), a twinaxial connection, or a remote link. It has a complete
set of integrated functions that enable desktop users to use IBM i resources as easily as
their local PC. Users and application programmers can, with IBM i Access for Windows,
quickly processes information, applications, and resources for their entire company.
IBM i: Built for e-business
With IBM i, you can Web-enable your information systems quickly, securely, and at a lower
cost than you might imagine. IBM built the IBM i to be the superior e-business solution for
companies like yours.
Key features of Domino for IBM i:
Is a full-fledged Lotus Domino server.
Enables the IBM i to be a server in your Notes network. Multiple (partitioned).
Domino servers can run on a single IBM i.

1-14 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Enables remote dial-in and dial-out.


Provides universal mail exchange among multiple e-mail offerings, including Lotus
Notes, OfficeVision, JustMail, POP3, and Internet e-mail.
Integrates data between Domino databases and DB2 for IBM i in both directions.
Synchronizes the Notes Public Address Book and the System Distribution Directory.
Provides simple-to-use mobile computing through the use of Notes replication.
Supports serving Domino Merchant databases and other Web content databases to
build e-commerce solutions.
Delivers a highly reliable and available Domino server through IBM i availability
features, such as RAID and Mirrored protection.
Integrates Domino for IBM i backup with standard IBM i backup.
Runs as an IBM i application, which isolates the server from other applications and
provides server recovery without restarting the entire system.
Co-exists with Lotus Notes servers and Lotus Domino servers on the IBM i Integrated
Server and supports replication with all other Lotus Domino servers.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-15

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

1-16 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Applications (2 of 2)
IBM i

IBM i and Java


The e-business software of the future is increasingly
being written in Java, and the IBM i operating system
is optimized to run Java far faster than other platforms.

IBM i Integration of Windows NT Server


In a single server, you can now run business-critical
applications on an IBM i and personal productivity
and other applications on Windows NT.

DB2 for IBM i


This advanced, 64-bit relational database system provides
leading-edge performance in new data warehousing and
data mining environments. It can satisfy every need from
the smallest departmental server to the largest enterprise
data warehouse.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-8. Applications (2 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-17

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

1-18 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Standard interface: Display session


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-9. Standard interface: Display session

OE9810.0

Notes:
The Standard interface used on the IBM i is a display session. Some users call this a
green screen because typically the standard screen presented when using this interface
uses green writing on a black background. In order to sign on to the system, a user must
have a valid user id and password. A security office or system administrator can set up
limits and controls that determine what this user can do once signed on to the system.
This is using a menu driven interface. A user can select options off of a menu to complete
tasks. Sometimes a menu option will call a command and other times it will display another
menu with its options. It is called menu navigation when going from one menu to the next.
You can navigate until the menu option selected calls a specific command.
The advantage of a menu driven System is that users do not need to know commands in
order to perform user or operator or administrator tasks. With practice and/or repetition,
eventually a user will learn the commands that are called when a menu option is selected.
Once the user is experienced then they can key in commands directly on the command
line. It is always faster to key in a command as opposed to using menu navigation as it
takes longer to navigate to the correct menu and choose the option off of that menu.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-19

Instructor Guide

There are also graphical user interfaces (GUI) options available that users can use instead
of a display session. Two GUI alternatives will be introduced in the next two topics.

1-20 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-21

Instructor Guide

What is System i Navigator?


IBM i

Graphical interface to the system


Installed on a PC as part of IBM I Access for Windows
5770-XE1
Fully integrated into Windows
Main window:
left pane contains the hierarchical view
right pane displays the details of a selected item
Menu bar: File, Edit, View, Help
Toolbar with smart icons
Context-sensitive toolbars and menus
Drag-and-drop support
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-10. What is System i Navigator?

OE9810.0

Notes:
System i Navigator is one of the graphical user interfaces (GUI) for managing your IBM i
servers. System i Navigator makes the operation and administration of the server easier
and more productive. Wizards guide you through setting up the supported functions.
The homepage Web address for System i Navigator is:
http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i/software/navigator/index.html
Listed below is a summary of some of the features, functions, and enhancements for
System i Navigator. We will cover some of these features in subsequent units of this
course.
Work management (Active jobs, subsystems, job queues, memory pools)
Graphical command prompting
System Values, including system comparison and update via Management Central
Distributed user/group administration via Management Central

1-22 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Licensed program and Fix creation, distribution, and installation via Management
Central
DASD management: Disk balancing, compression, management of disk pools, units
Simple two-node cluster configuration
Backup and Recovery (BRMS GUI plug-in)
Logical Partitioning (LPAR)
Job monitors and performance monitors that keep data for extended time periods
Integrated Netfinity Server: Windows user/group and disk administration

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-23

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

1-24 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Management Central
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-11. Management Central

OE9810.0

Notes:
Management Central is a powerful suite of systems management functions that make
managing multiple systems as easy as managing a single system. With Management
Central, you can manage multiple IBM i servers through a single central system. You no
longer have to worry about configuring communications connections to all your IBM i
servers or juggling multiple login sessions. Management Central is scalable, flexible, and
easily manipulated to fit the needs of your environment.
Use Management Central to manage multiple systems quickly and efficiently. Specifically,
you can:
Collect inventory: Collect inventory data (users and groups, fixes, system values,
hardware resources, software resources, service attributes, and contact information) on
a regular basis and store the data on a designated central system. Export any inventory
to a PC file to use with PC applications. When you need to send some of this collected
data to IBM for service and support, you can choose to do so automatically when the
data is collected.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-25

Instructor Guide

Manage fixes: Manage fixes (or PTFs, program temporary fixes) and fix groups across
multiple systems using modern graphical wizards. For example, use the Compare and
Update wizard to automatically compare a group of systems to a model system, find the
missing and extra fixes, and send the missing fixes to each system and install them.
Monitor system performance: Monitor the real-time performance of multiple IBM i
servers. Compare detailed graphs to help you visualize what is going on with your
systems.
Collect performance data: Collect performance data for future analysis by the
Performance Tools for IBM i licensed program or other performance report applications.
View historical data for metrics that have been collected for an extended period of time
for a particular monitor.
Run commands: Define a command, then run the command to multiple systems or a
group of systems. Use the Prompt button support for a graphical interface to CL
command syntax. Save a CL command that can be run over and over against multiple
systems and groups.
Send and install products: Create and install a product that you have defined. Use a
wizard to help you create and install your product. You can distribute and install your
own applications. You can also create your own fixes to manage your products.
Monitor jobs and servers: Monitor a job or a list of jobs based on job name, job user,
job type, subsystem, or server type.
Monitor message queues: Monitor any message queue for a group of messages that
you select. You can run a monitor on one or more systems. You can see the details of a
message, reply to a message, send a message, and delete a message.
Monitor files: Monitor selected files or all system logs for a specified text string, for a
specified size, or just to find out when the file has changed. You can also monitor the
IBM i history log for a specified text string. You can monitor files across multiple
endpoint systems.
Monitor B2B transaction activity: Monitor your B2B transactions and view a graph of
active transactions over time. You can run commands automatically when thresholds
are triggered and you can search for and display a specific transaction as well as view a
bar graph of the detailed steps of that specific transaction.
Manage users and groups: Manage users and groups across multiple systems using
Management Central. Collect an inventory of the users and groups on one or more
endpoint systems, and then view, search, or export that inventory to a PC.
Package and send data: Create a list of QSYS or Integrated File System (IFS) files
and treat them as a logical or physical group (for example, configuration data, Java
applications, HTML Web pages, software programs).
Schedule tasks and jobs: Organize when you want your tasks to occur -- either
immediately or at a later time.

1-26 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-27

Instructor Guide

IBM Systems Director Navigator for i


IBM i

New system
management tool
New Web-based tool
for managing IBM i
Alternative to
System i Navigator
Automatic installation
with IBM i version 7.1
Snap into IBM
Systems Director*

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-12. IBM Systems Director Navigator for i

OE9810.0

Notes:
IBM Systems Director Navigator for i replaces the System i Navigator Tasks for the Web
function in i 5.4.
System i Navigator Tasks for the Web provided servlet URLs for a subset of System i
Navigator (Windows) functions.
IBM Systems Director Navigator for i:
Director means progressing towards Director interfaces and functionality
Navigator means coming from System i Navigator heritage
Tool is part of IBM i and free (no charge)
90% of System i Navigator (Windows) function can be accessed via Web and IBM Systems
Director Navigator for i

1-28 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-29

Instructor Guide

How does Director Navigator for i compare to System i


Navigator?
IBM i

IBM Systems Director Navigator for i:


Intended for management of only the server where you point your
Web browser
Management Central capabilities are not included
You can use IBM Systems Director cross-platform products for multisystem management

Both can have functions restricted

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-13. How does Director Navigator for i compare to System i Navigator?

OE9810.0

Notes:

1-30 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-31

Instructor Guide

Topic 1.2: Documentation

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 1-14. Topic 1.2: Documentation

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

1-32 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-33

Instructor Guide

Reference: IBM i homepage


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-15. Reference: IBM i homepage

OE9810.0

Notes:
It is recommended that you connect to the IBM homepage for the IBM i and save this as a
favorite.
Notice the links that are available on the left side of the page to access all of the relevant or
additional information that may be of interest to you.
The URL to access this Web page is: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i/

1-34 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-35

Instructor Guide

Reference: IBM Systems Information Centers


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-16. Reference: IBM Systems Information Centers

OE9810.0

Notes:
IBM no longer ships any hard copy reference materials but instead makes these manuals
available by either using the Information Center CD that is shipped with your system or by
accessing this same information online via a Web site. The preferred method to use is
online as this will always provide you with the most recent or up-to-date information.
The Information Center Web site is different, depending on which generation of hardware is
installed.
IBM information Centers: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/eserver/
IBM i V7R1: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/iseries/v7r1m0/index.jsp
IBM i V6R1: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/iseries/v6r1m0/index.jsp
OS/400 V5R4: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/iseries/v5r4/index.jsp

1-36 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-37

Instructor Guide

Information Center: Basic operations


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-17. Information Center: Basic operations

OE9810.0

Notes:
To display the Web site on this visual, while on the visual on the last page, click IBM i V7R1
Information Center > Basic system operations.

1-38 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-39

Instructor Guide

IBM Redbooks: System i


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-18. IBM Redbooks: System i

OE9810.0

Notes:
To display the Web site on this visual enter the URL:
IBM http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/portals/systemi

1-40 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-41

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i

1. Which of the following is a resource for IBM i


information?
a.
b.
c.
d.

Information Center
IBM i home page
IBM i Redbooks Web page
All the above

2. Which of the following provide a user interface to the


IBM i?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

5250 emulation session


System i Navigator
Systems Director Navigator for i
All the above
Only two of the above
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-19. Checkpoint (1 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:

1-42 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2)
IBM i

1. Which of the following is a resource for IBM i information?


a. Information Center
b. IBM i home page
c.

IBM i Redbooks Web page

d. All the above

2. Which of the following provide a user interface to the IBM


i?
a. 5250 emulation session
b. System i Navigator
c.

Systems Director Navigator for i

d. All the above


e. Only two of the above
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-43

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i

3. Which of the following is supported by IBM i?


a. Central site maintenance
b. DB2 support
c.

Java

d. All the above


e. Only two of the above

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-20. Checkpoint (2 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:

1-44 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2)
IBM i

3. Which of the following is supported by IBM i?


a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Central site maintenance


DB2 support
Java
All the above
Only two of the above

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-45

Instructor Guide

Unit summary
IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:


Describe what is included within the IBM i operating system
Describe the history of the IBM i
List the supported user interfaces
Describe the difference between System i Navigator and
Systems Director Navigator for i
List Web sites that contain reference materials for IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 1-21. Unit summary

OE9810.0

Notes:

1-46 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 1. Introduction and overview to IBM i

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-47

Instructor Guide

1-48 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system


Estimated time
00:45

What this unit is about


This first thing you need to do to start a session is to sign on to the
system. In this unit you will be introduced to signing on via the 5250
emulation session commonly known as using the display session
interface, signing on and using System i Navigator graphical user
interface (GUI) and Systems Director Navigator for i browser interface.
The first topic in this unit introduces you to the display session
interface. In this unit the student will also be introduced to the
Operational Assistant user interface which will be the interface used
for the majority of this course. This unit also covers the different
keyboard types so that you can become productive on your system
quickly.
The second topic then covers using the System i Navigator GUI to
perform these same functions.
The third topic covers using the IBM Systems Director Navigator for i
GUI.

What you should be able to do


After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Sign on and off the display session interface (5250 emulation)
Use all the engraved and numbered function keys on the keyboard
Access the Operational Assistant menu
Sign on and off using System i Navigator
Sign on and off using Systems Director navigator for i

How You Will Check Your Progress


During the lecture you will sign on and use some commands and
function keys.
During the Lab exercise you will try out your new keyboard skills.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-1

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint questions

2-2

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit objectives
IBM i

After completing this unit, you should be able to:


Sign on and off the display session interface (5250 emulation)
Use all the engraved and numbered function keys on the
keyboard
Access the Operational Assistant menu
Sign on and off using System i Navigator
Sign on and off using IBM Systems Director Navigator for i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-1. Unit objectives

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-3

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-4

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 2.1:
Using 5250 emulation interface

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 2-2. Topic 2.1:Using 5250 emulation interface

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-5

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-6

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

The Sign On display


IBM i

Only two lines are important now:


User and Password
Type your user name on the User line: OE98xx
Press Tab.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-3. The Sign On display

OE9810.0

Notes:
If you make a mistake while typing your name, you can easily correct it by using the
Backspace key located on the upper right-hand corner of the keyboard. The appearance
of the Backspace key may be different depending on what keyboard is being used.
When you press the Backspace key the cursor will move to the left one space. You now
can type over the spelling mistake to correct it. If you have extra letters left over use the
Delete key.
The appearance of the Sign On screen may be different at your workplace. Many of our
customers create company logos as part of the Sign On screen.
The visual shows the IBM-shipped default Sign On screen.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-7

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-8

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Your password
IBM i

Should not be known by other users


Will be invisible (non-display) when
typed

It's a
secret!

If a mistake is made when either the


user ID or the password is entered, an
error message is displayed.
The number of times a mistake can be
made may be limited on your system

Type your password: OE98PWD


Press Enter
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-4. Your password

OE9810.0

Notes:
Do not worry about making a mistake while typing your password on this course; it is not a
serious problem. However back at your workplace, the system might be set up to restrict
the number of times you can make a mistake before the system takes some action to
prevent you from signing on. You should ask your system operator for guidance.
If you make a mistake while on this course, the system will tell you by presenting a
message at the bottom of the screen: Password not correct for user profile.
You will have to enter your password again. Please note the cursor will return to the User
line. From here, you can check your spelling of the user name. Then press the Tab key to
go to the password line and reenter your password.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-9

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-10 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

IBM i Main Menu


IBM i

The menu you see, depends


on how your user profile has
been set up.
The exact appearance of the
menu depends on your user
class.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-5. IBM i Main Menu

OE9810.0

Notes:
As indicated, the menu that displays at your workplace will depend on how your user profile
was setup by the system administrator. We will cover the user profile later in this course.
Shown on the screen is the IBM i Main Menu. All of the menus provided by IBM will show
the name of the menu in the upper left-hand corner of the screen.
The options on the IBM i Main Menu are used to access the more complex system
functions.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-11

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-12 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Accessing Operational Assistant


IBM i

To perform the tasks in this


course, it is necessary to start
from this menu.
Can be accessed by:
Pressing the Attn key or ESC
key
Selecting an option off a menu
Typing GO ASSIST on a
command line
Press the Attn. key.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-6. Accessing Operational Assistant

OE9810.0

Notes:
The IBM i Operational Assistant menu provides easy access to most commonly performed
functions. This is a menu interface used for users who are new to the system and / or may
not be technically proficient. As much as possible this menu interface will use standard
terminology instead of technical terms.
The strategy is for users to use this menu interface to become familiar with the system, to
get over any fears of working on a new system. Once the user becomes comfortable on the
system then the administrator will begin to wean the user off of this menu and will instruct
users to start using and working off of the Main menu.
This course presents the basic IBM i tasks that can be performed through the Operational
Assistant menu.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-13

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-14 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Signing off
IBM i

You can sign off your IBM i session in one of the following
ways:
Use the sign off option from an application display.
Use Option 80 from the Operational Assistant menu.
Use Option 90 from the System i Main Menu.
Type SIGNOFF on a command line.

...........................................................
Select Option 90 from the Main menu
or Option 80 from Operational Assistant
...........................................................
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-7. Signing off

OE9810.0

Notes:
Option 80 (Temporary sign off) allows you to temporarily suspend the application you are
working in until you sign back on to your next IBM i session. This option can be used when
you go to lunch. After signing back on again, you can go directly to where you left off
without having to work your way through a lot of unnecessary displays.
NOTE: The requirement for you to be able to sign back onto your interrupted job is that you
must leave the emulation session window open on your windows desktop. If you sign off of
the system and then close the emulation window you will not be able to reconnect to your
interrupted job.
You should be that aware there is a limit to the length of time you can be temporarily signed
off. You should ask your system operator what the limit is for your system.
If this time is exceeded, the job you were working on will be ENDED. You will have to start
all over again.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-15

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-16 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

The keyboard
IBM i

Your keyboard contains:


Engraved functions keys
Enter key
Page up / Page down keys
Error reset key

- Depends on how keyboard


was set up
- Details on the following
pages

Print key
Field Exit key
Numbered function keys

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-8. The keyboard

OE9810.0

Notes:
The versatility of the IBM i system allows many possible display station and keyboard
combinations.
If you have questions (particularly if you are using a PC keyboard), refer to your display
stations User Guide or keyboard manual.
You should be aware that keyboards can be programmed to perform functions different
from standard operations. For example, the Print key could be set to perform some other
function than printing the screen contents.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-17

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-18 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Engraved function keys


IBM i

Information about function keys:


The function keys have words, abbreviations of word, or
symbols printed on them.
Generally, each of these keys performs a single function.
We will use the name that is used on most keyboards.
If an engraved function key shown here is not available on
your keyboard, refer to Appendix E, "Keyboards" in the System
Operation for New Users manual.

Enter

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-9. Engraved function keys

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-19

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-20 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

The Enter key


IBM i

Use the Enter key to submit


information that you have entered
on the display for the system to
process.

Enter

Commands or menu options are


examples of information you want
the system to process.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-10. The Enter key

OE9810.0

Notes:
Be Careful!
The Enter key on some personal computers looks like a New Line key.
Pressing this key may prematurely submit the information you are entering.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-21

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-22 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Page Up and Page Down keys


IBM i

Page
Up

Called Roll keys on some keyboards.

Page
Down

When More.. is shown in the lower right-hand corner of a


display, Page Down can be used to move toward the bottom
of the information and Page Up can be used to move toward
the top.
Type a reply, press Enter
More. . .
= = = > _________________________________________________
F3=Exit

F12 =Cancel

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-11. Page Up and Page Down keys

OE9810.0

Notes:
On some keyboards, the Page Up and Page Down keys are called ROLL KEYS.
Please note that when the word MORE appears in the lower right-hand corner, you can use
the Page Down key to view the next screen. When you have reached the bottom of the
text, the system will display BOTTOM. At this point, you can use the Page Up key to scroll
to the beginning of the text.
How you use these keys depends on the type of display station you have:
With 5250 display stations press and hold the Shift Key and press the appropriate Roll
keys.
With PCs press the Page Up or Page Down keys as needed.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-23

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-24 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Error Reset key


IBM i

If your keyboard becomes locked


up (it fails to respond to anything
you type), you can press the Error
Reset key to unlock your keyboard
and continue typing.

Error
0005

0005

On most PCs, the Error Reset key


is the left Control (Ctrl) key.

Ctr
l

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-12. Error Reset key

OE9810.0

Notes:
Sometimes, your keyboard will lock up (will not allow you to enter anything); pressing the
Error Reset key will unlock or reset the keyboard.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-25

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-26 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

The Print key


IBM i

Used to print information currently shown on the display


ASSIST

Operational Assistant(TM) Menu

System: I520DVL3
To select one of the following, type its number below and
press Enter:
1.
2.

Print
Screen

Work with printer output


Work with jobs

Print

Ctr
l

The location of the Print key varies,


depending on the keyboard.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-13. The Print key

OE9810.0

Notes:
When you press the Print key, one of the following will occur:
The displayed information is printed immediately on the system printer or on the printer
assigned to your job. A message then appears at the bottom of the screen indicating if
your job was printed or if a Spool file was created. You will need to press the Error
Reset key to unlock your keyboard.
Nothing is printing because the printer assigned to your display station is currently not
available. Again, you will receive a message at the bottom of the screen that indicates
the request could not be completed.
This information and other information are put on an OUTPUT QUEUE (this will be
explained later in this course). Again, you will have to use the Error Reset key to unlock
your keyboard.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-27

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-28 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Field Exit key: A little more than tab


IBM i

The Field Exit key moves to the next field, but with a difference: Any characters
at, and to the right of the cursor in the field where you were typing, are deleted.

Message text . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Here is my message
throw away
________________
Name , F4 for list

Before: Cursor is here

Message text . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Here is my message
___________
________________
Name , F4 for list

After: Cursor is now here


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-14. Field Exit key: A little more than tab

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-29

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-30 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Numbered function keys


IBM i

On most keyboards, including PCs, the function keys are the


top row of keys or are on a pad on the right side of the
keyboard. They have the letter F on them.

Ctr
l

If you have only one row of function keys, to use the F13
through F24 keys, you need to use the Shift key along with the
corresponding function keys. Foe example: Press the Shift key
and the F1 key to specify F13.
Selection or command
===>_________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F9=Retrieve
F12=Cancel
F13=Information Assistant
F23= Set initial menu
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-15. Numbered function keys

OE9810.0

Notes:
The Function keys that you can use are listed at the bottom of the screen, along with a
brief description of the functions they will perform.
Please note that different function keys will be presented, depending on the screen you are
on and your user profile. (We will cover your user profile later in this course.)

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-31

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-32 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 2.2:
Using System i Navigator interface

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 2-16. Topic 2.2:Using System i Navigator interface

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-33

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-34 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Sign on to System i Navigator


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-17. Sign on to System i Navigator

OE9810.0

Notes:
System i Navigator prompts for a user ID and password. This it is the same user ID and
password that you would use if you are signing on to a 5250 display session emulation
session. If you are a new user on this system then contact your system administrator for a
valid user ID and password.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-35

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

2-36 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

System i Navigator
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-18. System i Navigator

OE9810.0

Notes:
As a user, the functions available to use or display are controlled by both the user ID and
the IBM i Access software loaded on the PC.
In some ways IBM i appears like Windows Explorer. Windows Explorer lists file folders
(directories) and files. Systems i Navigator displays IBM i systems and a central
management point for systems attached.
The left-hand side of the display shows the systems that are managed by Management
Central. Then listed under My Connections are all the IBM i systems that have been
defined by your system administrator to Systems i Navigator. Assuming you have a valid
user id and password you can sign on to these systems to perform user, system operator or
system administrator tasks; based on what authority is assigned to your user profile.
The right-hand side of the display shows the details of what has been highlighted and
selected on the left.
The bottom area is known as the task pad. This area presents you different options or
functions you can perform.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-37

Instructor Guide

The functions displayed for each system are dependent on the IBM i operating system
release the system is running.

2-38 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-39

Instructor Guide

Basic operations
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-19. Basic operations

OE9810.0

Notes:
Basic Operations is the only branch of the Navigator tree that is automatically installed on
your PC when you install IBM i Access for Windows.
With this interface there is no option provided to sign off the system. You can sign off of
windows and log in with a different windows user id or you can reboot your PC to clear the
memory buffer (to clear you user id and password).

2-40 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-41

Instructor Guide

Topic 2.3:
Using Systems Director Navigator for i
interface

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 2-20. Topic 2.3:Using Systems Director Navigator for i interface

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

2-42 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-43

Instructor Guide

Enter the following URL into a browser


IBM i

http://system:2001
system could be either the IP address or IP name

Supports the following browsers:


Microsoft Internet Explorer, 6.0 or later
Mozilla Firefox, 1.0 or later

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-21. Enter the following URL into a browser

OE9810.0

Notes:
To establish a connection to the system using Systems Director Navigator for i, open one of
the supported browsers and specify either the TCP/IP name or address of your system and
port 2001.

2-44 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-45

Instructor Guide

User verification
IBM i

The URL will be rerouted to a secure path Port 2005.


Enter your IBM i user ID and password for this system.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-22. User verification

OE9810.0

Notes:
The system will redirect your connection to port 2005 and prompt you to enter your user id
and password. This is the same information that you would enter when signing to a 5250
display session or System i Navigator session.

2-46 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-47

Instructor Guide

Welcome page
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-23. Welcome page

OE9810.0

Notes:
The first time you connect to the system you will see the Welcome panel. The panel can be
turned off so that it is not the first thing you see when you sign on using this interface.
Notice that the first link in the upper left side of the screen is used to call up this panel.

2-48 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-49

Instructor Guide

Basic operations page


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-24. Basic operations page

OE9810.0

Notes:
Remember to sign off of the system before you close this browser window. If you close this
window without first signing off you will leave a job running the on system. The system will
go into error recovery to try to fix the job that lost the communications with your PC.

2-50 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-51

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. To sign on to an IBM i using 5250 emulation, you will need a


user ID, password, and program ID.
a. True
b. False

2. It is possible to customize the main menu the user will see


when logging on to an IBM i.
a. True
b. False

3. Which keys on a PC keyboard can clear the "More" when it is


displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the screen?
a.
b.
c.
d.

Enter key
Ctrl key
Pause
PgUp or PgDn
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-25. Checkpoint (1 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

2-52 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. To sign on to an IBM i using 5250 emulation, you will need a


user ID, password, and program ID.
a. True
b. False

2. It is possible to customize the main menu the user will see


when logging on to an IBM i.
a. True
b. False

3. Which keys on a PC keyboard can clear the "More" when it is


displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the screen?
a.
b.
c.
d.

Enter key
Ctrl key
Pause
PgUp or PgDn
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-53

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (2 of 3)
IBM i

4. Which of the following is a method to access Operational


Assistant?
a.
b.
c.
d.

Pressing the ESC key


Pressing the Ctrl Break key
Selecting option 80 on the menu screen
Typing "go assist" on the command line

5. You can use the same user ID and password to sign on to


System i Navigator that you use to sign on to a display
session on the same system.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-26. Checkpoint (2 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

2-54 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 3)
IBM i

4. Which of the following is a method to access Operational


Assistant?
a.
b.
c.
d.

Pressing the ESC key


Pressing the Ctrl Break key
Selecting option 80 on the menu screen
Typing "go assist" on the command line

5. You can use the same user ID and password to sign on to


System i Navigator that you use to sign on to a display
session on the same system.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-55

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (3 of 3)
IBM i

6. You must make a choice to either sign on to the display


session or System i Navigator, since you cannot sign on to
both at the same time.
a. True
b. False

7. IBM Systems Director Navigator for i can be used to perform


which of the following tasks?
a.
b.
c.
d.

User
System operator
System administrator
All of the above

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-27. Checkpoint (3 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

2-56 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (3 of 3)
IBM i

6. You must make a choice to either sign on to the display


session or System i Navigator, since you cannot sign on to
both at the same time.
a. True
b. False

7. IBM Systems Director Navigator for i can be used to perform


which of the following tasks?
a.
b.
c.
d.

User
System operator
System administrator
All of the above

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-57

Instructor Guide

Unit summary
IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:


Sign on and off the display session interface (5250 emulation)
Use all the engraved and numbered function keys on the
keyboard
Access the Operational Assistant menu
Sign on and off using System i Navigator
Sign on and off using Systems Director navigator for i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 2-28. Unit summary

OE9810.0

Notes:

2-58 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 2. Signing on and off the system

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-59

Instructor Guide

2-60 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces


Estimated time
00:45

What this unit is about


When you request system functions on the IBM i, the system will
respond by displaying information to you and sometimes by asking
you for information. The format used by the system will be one of the
following:
Menu
Entry display
List display
Information display
In this unit, you will learn how to work with these types of displays.

What you should be able to do


After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Sign on to the 5250 green screen emulation interface and use:
- Menus
- Entry displays
- List displays
- Information displays
Sign on the system with System i Navigator
Sign on the system with Systems Director Navigator for i

How You Will Check Your Progress


During the lecture you will follow along with the instructor.
During the lab exercise you will practice using the display types
covered in lecture.
Checkpoint questions

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-1

Instructor Guide

Unit objectives
IBM i

After completing this unit, you should be able to:


Sign on to the 5250 green screen emulation interface and use:
Menus
Entry displays
List displays
Information displays

Sign on the system with System i Navigator


Sign on the system with Systems Director Navigator for i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-1. Unit objectives

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-2

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-3

Instructor Guide

Topic 3.1: Using


5250 green screen displays

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 3-2. Topic 3.1: Using 5250 green screen displays

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-4

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-5

Instructor Guide

Menus
IBM i

The purpose of a menu is to provide a convenient way to


select the work to be done.
Choosing an option from a menu is easier than entering long
strings of commands.
With a menu, there is no need to remember commands.

M enus
It's
Easy

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-3. Menus

OE9810.0

Notes:
Welcome to the display session (some users call it the green screen because of the
appearance of the default screen) environment.
The IBM i has been using these types of screens from its introduction in 1986. The vast
majority of our customers in the general business environment prefer these types of
screens over the graphical Interface available.

3-6

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-7

Instructor Guide

User menu
IBM i

Menu ID

Menu
title

Input
area

List
of
options

Function
Keys

Message line
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-4. User menu

OE9810.0

Notes:
The title is in the middle of the top of the screen.
The menu ID is in the upper left-hand corner. Menus are the only types of displays that
have menu IDs.
The options listed may vary because your system administrator may have eliminated
some options to simplify your job.
Note the Input area (referred to as the command line); this is the place where you can
enter commands or options listed on the menu above.
Below the Input line is a list of function keys with a brief description of what each key
does. The point to remember is that function keys will also vary depending on which menu
you are using.
If there are more function keys available, you will see F24 = more keys to display any
additional function keys that may be available.

3-8

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-9

Instructor Guide

Using the message line


IBM i

If you are in the Operational Assistant menus input area:


Type 79.
Press Enter.
Message line displays:
Specified menu selection is not correct

Press Field Exit to clear the input area:


Press Enter.
Message line displays:
Type option number

Put your cursor on the message and press HELP.


Additional information is displayed
Press F12 to go back to the menu.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-5. Using the message line

OE9810.0

Notes:
The Message line is at the bottom of the screen and typically is just one line long. The
system uses this line to communicate with you, posting information and corrective action if
required from you.
In addition to this message line, you can move your cursor to a message (if posted) and
press your HELP key for more detailed information about the message. We will cover
Using Help on the system later in this course.

3-10 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-11

Instructor Guide

Let's practice menu navigation


IBM i

Operational
Assistant Menu
Option 75

F12

Information and
Problem Handling

In this case, F3
accomplishes the same
action.
F3 goes back to the
previous menu.

USERHELP Menu

F12 goes back to the


previous display.

Option 1
How to use Help
is a display

F12

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-6. Let's practice menu navigation

OE9810.0

Notes:
The F3 key is your Exit key; use this key to get out of whatever you are doing. Officially, the
F3 key is used to exit the program or function you are in and return you to the previous
menu.
The F12 key is easily confused with the F3 key. While F3 takes you completely out of the
situation, pressing the F12 key usually takes you back to the previous display.

3-12 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-13

Instructor Guide

Using GO command
IBM i

You can go to a specific menu by using the GO command.


Type GO followed by the menu name on any command line
Selection or command
===>___________________________________________________________________________
GO ASSIST
_______________________________________________________________________________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel
F13=Information Assistant
F23= Set initial menu

To see all of the menus that are available on the IBM i, type GO
*ALL.
GO PRINTER
GO SAVE
GO MAIN
GO ASSIST

Some Useful
menus

GO BACKUP
GO TAPE
GO PROBLEM
GO PTF

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-7. Using GO command

OE9810.0

Notes:
If you cannot remember the exact menu name you wish to use, type GO and the first letter
of the menu name followed by an asterisk.
For example: GO P* will provide a list of menu names starting with the letter P.
The visual on this page shows some useful GO menu commands that you can try later in
lab.
Note: Refer to Appendix A for a list of the more commonly used menus.

3-14 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-15

Instructor Guide

A special menu: System Request


IBM i

Can be used to start an alternative session at your display station


Once the second session is started, System Request menu can be
used to switch between your two active sessions.
To access the System Request menu:
Press System Request.
Press Enter.
The System Request menu
is displayed.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-8. A special menu: System Request

OE9810.0

Notes:
If you choose Option 1, the system will present a second Sign On screen and allow you to
sign on to a second session. However, if you do this, the job (interactive job) you were
doing will become temporarily suspended (all work within that job is suspended). This job
will not begin again until you sign off the second session or you use the System Request
key to jump back to or switch to session 1.
There are many reasons you might want to use System Request. For example, look at
Option 4 Display messages and Option 5 Send messages.

3-16 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-17

Instructor Guide

Entry display example


IBM i

Default values are provided for most fields


Required fields are usually highlighted
You can prompt the system for possible
choices by placing the cursor somewhere
within an entry field and pressing F4 key

F4

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-9. Entry display example

OE9810.0

Notes:
Entry displays prompt you or ask you for information. There are many different displays on
the system.
Most of the entry fields are already filled in for you, the filled-in fields are using system
defaults.
The F4 key can be used to prompt you for possible choices. We will try this in the lab.

3-18 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-19

Instructor Guide

List display example


IBM i

Options available

More items on next


page use Page Up

Input field where option


number may be typed
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-10. List display example

OE9810.0

Notes:
Information requested by you is gathered from within the system and displayed in columns.
The options available vary depending on the purpose of the display and your user authority.
The word Bottom appears in the lower right-hand corner if this is the last page of text.
Occasionally, you might see an Extended list display. The information on this type of list
display does not fit within one screen. By using the F11 key, you will be able to shift the text
(right or left) on the screen.

3-20 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-21

Instructor Guide

Select the assistance level: F21


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-11. Select the assistance level: F21

OE9810.0

Notes:
By using the F21 function key, the present setting will be overruled only for the display you
are in. The system will remember this setting and will use it any time you return to this
particular display.
Assistance level 1: The system will not use computer jargon when communicating with
you. Basic operation only (less job control).
Assistance level 2: Will allow more job control, but the system will use computer jargon
when it communicates to you.
Example:
- Assistance level 1 = System would display printer not available
- Assistance level 2 = System would display device not vary on

3-22 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-23

Instructor Guide

Information display
IBM i

The page contains information only.


It does not need input data from you.
The purpose is to pass information from the
system to the user.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-12. Information display

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-24 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-25

Instructor Guide

Topic 3.2: Using


System i Navigator panels

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 3-13. Topic 3.2: Using System i Navigator panels

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-26 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-27

Instructor Guide

General navigation
IBM i

The layout and navigation


functions are as follows:
Main window:
(1) Left pane contains the
hierarchical view

(2) Right pane displays the


details of a selected item
(3) Task pad show shortcuts,
change as you select a
function
(4) My taskpad does not
change, contains shortcuts
you copy here
Menu bar: File, Edit, View,
Help
Toolbar with smart icons
Context-sensitive toolbars and
menus
Drag-and-drop support

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-14. General navigation

OE9810.0

Notes:
This visual provides a list of many of the terms and actions you can take by accessing the
various levels of IBM i functions.

3-28 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-29

Instructor Guide

General navigation: Window view


IBM i

List header

Menu Options in Menu Bar or Pull down Menu


Buttons in Toolbar

Column
headings

Collapse
button

Function Tree

Left pane

Right pane
Details pane

Function,
Container, or
subfunction

List view

Expand button

Scroll up/down

Expand/
Collapse pane
Separator
Scroll left/right
Status Bar

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-15. General navigation: Window view

OE9810.0

Notes:
Consider the left pane as the function tree area with a + (plus sign) character to the left of a
function (container), which indicates there are lower level functions/containers. Clicking the
+ expands the function. Once an item is expanded, the - (minus) character appears. You
can click it to collapse the detailed items back to the higher level item.
Right-clicking an item brings up a pop up menu that includes a list of one or more actions.
This is called a context-sensitive menu because the list of actions depends on the item on
which you right-click. There are also context-sensitive toolbars.
You can expand or shrink the area of the window with your mouse by dragging the vertical
or horizontal edges of a window pane. This is especially important when you have a list of
items in the right pane since you may have more columns of information than you can see
on your physical device.
Some functions automatically update the right pane of information when some status
changes. Other functions do not, so you must either periodically use the F5 key or click the
Refresh button in the toolbar.

3-30 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-31

Instructor Guide

Context-sensitive menu for system


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-16. Context-sensitive menu for system

OE9810.0

Notes:
You can access the menu for a system by selecting (clicking) the system and selecting the
File option or right-clicking the system name. We show Properties to illustrate the many
sets of information available for the system. You can see what IBM i release the system
has installed and many other sets of information including:
Current IPL settings
Which plug-ins you have installed
Current connection settings
Current Secure Socket Layers settings
Manage Central Application Administration
Administration of the Directory Server
Service Tools network interface

3-32 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details Discuss how to call up context menus (the different ways these are called up)
Do not describe the system properties themselves
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-33

Instructor Guide

Using the Include function (1 of 2)


IBM i

OR

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-17. Using the Include function (1 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:
When you first use System i Navigator, some functions such as Basic Operations ->
Messages, default to show messages only for the user who has signed on through System
i Navigator. This is termed the current user. While other functions may default to show
all jobs in the system.
The Include function can be used to expand or limit the set of information that will appear
in the right pane details list.
Just like on the green screen where there are multiple ways to perform a function, the same
is true with GUI. To call up the Include function you must first highlight the function of
interest, for example Messages or Printer output or Jobs, then you will either:
Right clicked the container that is highlighted
Click view
Press the F11 key
and then selected Include from the context menu.

3-34 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-35

Instructor Guide

Using the Include function (2 of 2)


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-18. Using the Include function (2 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:
On this page we see the window that pop up when using the Include function for:
Messages which is actually displaying the GUI for the Display message (DSPMSG)
command
Printer output is actually displaying the GUI for the Work with spool files (WRKSPLF)
command
Jobs is actually displaying the GUI for the Work with user jobs (WRKUSRJOB)
command

3-36 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-37

Instructor Guide

Using the Columns function


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-19. Using the Columns function

OE9810.0

Notes:
When you perform a function that produces a list in the right pane, you may not see all the
available fields of information, here called columns. This could be because the active
window is not wide enough to show all columns (watch the scroll right - left indication in the
lower area of the right pane).
You may also not see all the information when there may be additional columns all of
which either do not fit on a full physical screen width or are considered by default as
optional information.
The column function lets you add columns of information (if any), remove columns of
information, or rearrange the left to right order of the column information.

3-38 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-39

Instructor Guide

Topic 3.3: Using Systems Director Navigator


for i pages

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 3-20. Topic 3.3: Using Systems Director Navigator for i pages

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-40 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-41

Instructor Guide

What is included?
IBM i

All Web-enabled functions of System i Navigator, organized


into 13 different task categories (over 300 tasks total)
Jobs, messages, system values, database, users, file systems,
security, performance, and so on

In addition, functions from the following for-purchase LPPs will


be available in the console when the LPPs are installed:
iHASM
(System i High Availability Solutions Manager)

5761-HAS

BRMS (Backup, Recovery, and Media Services)

5761-BR1

IBM Performance Tools for i5/OS (DiskWatcher)

5761-PT1

IBM Performance Tools for i5/OS (JobWatcher)

5761-PT1 option 3

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-21. What is included?

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-42 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-43

Instructor Guide

New controls overview (1 of 2)


IBM i

Left navigation groups


all the tasks in logical
compartments

New tab for each view

Help link!

Most common
functions
included on
each Welcome
menu

All functions

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-22. New controls overview (1 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-44 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-45

Instructor Guide

New controls overview (2 of 2)


IBM i

Fast path icons to Table tasks

Select from the available actions


Object tasks

Filters

Category tasks

Sorts

Table tasks

Entry selection

o Columns, Filters, Sorts

Select an entry.
Click the arrow.
Tasks for object.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-23. New controls overview (2 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-46 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-47

Instructor Guide

New controls overview: Terms


IBM i

Banner: Common image


across all consoles

Page Bar: Navigate between pages

Navigation Tree:
Group tasks

Work area
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-24. New controls overview: Terms

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-48 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-49

Instructor Guide

Basic operations tasks


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-25. Basic operations tasks

OE9810.0

Notes:
Notice that the Basic Operations task is essentially the same when compared to System i
Navigator.
Choose a task to see the Include and the Columns functions.

3-50 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-51

Instructor Guide

Include function for messages


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-26. Include function for messages

OE9810.0

Notes:
Just like in System i Navigator, the include function also available with this interface but the
operations to call up this function are slightly different.
First you will click on the specific task that you will perform, in this example the
messages task.
Once you are displaying this task then click the down arrow and click on the include
function.
This will display the panel in the lower right corner of the display so you can specify
which messages to include in the display.

3-52 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-53

Instructor Guide

Columns function for jobs


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-27. Columns function for jobs

OE9810.0

Notes:
Just like in System i Navigator, the columns function also available with this interface but
the operations to call up this function are slightly different.
First you will click on the specific task that you will perform, in this example the jobs
task.
Once you are displaying this task then click the down arrow and click on the columns
function.
This will display the panel in the lower right corner of the display so you can specify
which columns of information to display.

3-54 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-55

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i

1. You can prompt the system for possible choices by placing


the cursor somewhere within an entry field and pressing the
___ key.
a. F3
b. F4
c. F5
d. F6

2. Which assistance level will allow you job control and uses
computer jargon to communicate with you?
a. Assistance level 1
b. Assistance level 2

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-28. Checkpoint (1 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-56 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2)
IBM i

1. You can prompt the system for possible choices by placing


the cursor somewhere within an entry field and pressing the
___ key.
a.
b.
c.
d.

F3
F4
F5
F6

2. Which assistance level will allow you job control and uses
computer jargon to communicate with you?
a. Assistance level 1
b. Assistance level 2

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-57

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i

3. Using System request can start an alternate session at your


display station.
a. True
b. False

4. Using the include function, it is possible to specify what


information is to be displayed for a task using the GUI .
a. True
b. False

5. Using the include columns function, it is possible to choose


which columns of information and in what order they are
displayed in a 5250 green screen session.
a. True
b. False
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-29. Checkpoint (2 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-58 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2)
IBM i

3. Using System request can start an alternate session at your


display station.
a. True
b. False

4. Using the include function, it is possible to specify what


information is to be displayed for a task using the GUI .
a. True
b. False

5. Using the include columns function, it is possible to choose


which columns of information and in what order they are
displayed in a 5250 green screen session.
a. True
b. False
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-59

Instructor Guide

Exercises 1: Signing on to the system


IBM i

Please complete
Exercises 1
Signing on to the system

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-30. Exercises 1: Signing on to the system

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-60 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-61

Instructor Guide

Unit summary
IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:


Sign on to the 5250 green screen emulation interface and use:
Menus
Entry displays
List displays
Information displays

Sign on the system with System i Navigator


Sign on the system with Systems Director Navigator for i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 3-31. Unit summary

OE9810.0

Notes:

3-62 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 3. Using supported interfaces

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-63

Instructor Guide

3-64 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit 4. Using online help


Estimated time
00:30

What this unit is about


This unit discusses the online information available on your IBM i
system, more commonly referred to as help text. We will also explain
how you can access this information from a work station.

What you should be able to do


After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Explain the different types of online help information displays and
how to access each type from your display station
Explain how to access online help information from System i
Navigator
Explain how to access online help information from Systems
Director Navigator for i
List Web sites that can provide assistance for IBM i users

How You Will Check Your Progress


During the lecture, you will follow along with the instructor
During the lab exercise, you will practice your skills by using
various methods to access help information.
Checkpoint questions

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-1

Instructor Guide

Unit objectives
IBM i

After completing this unit, you should be able to:


Explain the different types of online help information displays
and how to access each type from your display station
Explain how to access online help information from System i
Navigator
Explain how to access online help information from Systems
Director Navigator for i
List Web sites that can provide assistance for IBM i users

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-1. Unit objectives

OE9810.0

Notes:

4-2

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-3

Instructor Guide

Topic 4.1: Using


display session help

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 4-2. Topic 4.1: Using display session help

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

4-4

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-5

Instructor Guide

Using online information


IBM i

Extended help information for display


Help information for a field
Information Assistant
Info Center

Help
F1

Use the F1
key to
access
Help.

Press the
Help key

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-3. Using online information

OE9810.0

Notes:
The IBM i system has a very user-friendly built-in Help facility. Help is cursor-sensitive. This
means that all you need do is move the cursor to a particular area, option, or field on a
screen and press the Help key to receive help information about that area, option, or field.
On all keyboards, you can use the F1 key to access online help.
The Information Assistant menu provides many different options that you can use to learn
more about system help information. For example, you can use this display to find out how
you can comment on information and view the highlights of the current release.

4-6

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-7

Instructor Guide

Extended help information for a display


IBM i

You can get extended


help information for any
IBM i system display

We provide a
lot of help.

Extended help provides


the following information
about displays:
What the display does

F2

How to use the display


Which function keys can be
used

F2

Extended Help

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-4. Extended help information for a display

OE9810.0

Notes:
You can get extended help information for any system display. Extended help provides the
following help information about displays:
What the display does
How to use the display
Which function keys can be used
To get the extended help information, you do the following:
1. Put your cursor on:
Any part of the display's title line
A blank menu option line
A completely blank line on the display
Any instruction
A blank selection line
4-8

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

2. Then, press the Help key. Extended help information is displayed.


If the extended help information is longer than one display, page up or page down to
move through the information.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-9

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-10 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Accessing help
IBM i

Help

Put your cursor on:


Any part of the
display's title line F1
A completely
blank line on the
display
Any instruction
Any blank
selection line or
menu option
Press Help key.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-5. Accessing help

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-11

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-12 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Field help: Menus


IBM i

Help
F1

Help information for a


particular option on the
system menus can be
obtained in two ways:
By placing the cursor anywhere
on the line that contains the
option number and description,
and pressing the Help key
By typing the option number on
the menu option line and
pressing Help the key.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-6. Field help: Menus

OE9810.0

Notes:
Menu Displays: You can receive help information about each option listed on a menu.
Help information for a particular option on a system menu can be obtained in one of two
ways:
By typing the option number on the menu option line and pressing the Help or F1 key
By placing the cursor anywhere on the line that contains the option number and
description, and pressing the Help or F1 key

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-13

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-14 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Field help: Entry displays


IBM i

Position your cursor on the


field where the entry is to be
made and then press the Help
key.

Help
F1

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-7. Field help: Entry displays

OE9810.0

Notes:
Note that F2 provides extended help. This will provide detailed help information on the
entire display you are currently viewing.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-15

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-16 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Field help: List displays


IBM i

Help
F1

Help for fields on list displays


provides information on the
meaning of each column.
Put the cursor in the column of
information.
Press the Help key to get help
about that specific column.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-8. Field help: List displays

OE9810.0

Notes:
The main point to remember here is that help is cursor-sensitive.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-17

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-18 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Information Assistant
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-9. Information Assistant

OE9810.0

Notes:
Option 1 will provide you with a glimpse of the types of IBM i information, such as:
IBM i printed manuals
Manuals on CD-ROM (softcopy)
Lists the IBM i home page which contains links for support, education, and so on.
Other documentation (Redbooks and related information)
Contact your system administrator for more assistance.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-19

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-20 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 4.2: Using


System i Navigator help

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 4-10. Topic 4.2: Using System i Navigator help

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-21

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-22 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Help
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-11. Help

OE9810.0

Notes:
Click the option for Help to see the panels on the next few visuals.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-23

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-24 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Help Topics
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-12. Help Topics

OE9810.0

Notes:
You can find help in System i Navigator from any dialog or window.
This help appears in several different types of windows.
Most of the System i Navigator online help appears in the left pane of your help window.
Click on a How do I topic to find instructions on performing a task.
Click on a Tell me about topic to learn more information about that topic.
Additionally, you can search across different functional areas to find the information that
you need.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-25

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-26 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Help: What can I do with?


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-13. Help: What can I do with?

OE9810.0

Notes:
To see this display scroll down from the display on the previous visual, expand
Configuration and Service and click on Fixes inventory.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-27

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-28 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

IBM i Information Center


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-14. IBM i Information Center

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-29

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-30 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Click the Help button for full screen help


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-15. Click the Help button for full screen help

OE9810.0

Notes:
Click the Help button to get help about the entire panel being displayed.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-31

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-32 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Click the ? for specific help


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-16. Click the ? for specific help

OE9810.0

Notes:
Clicking the question mark (?) will alter the mouse which now looks like a ?, so that you can
point and click to get help for a specific parameter or a specific area of the screen.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-33

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-34 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 4.3: Using Systems Director Navigator


for i help

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 4-17. Topic 4.3: Using Systems Director Navigator for i help

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-35

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-36 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Learn how to use help


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-18. Learn how to use help

OE9810.0

Notes:
Using the Eclipse help system: Browse topics in the Contents frame on the left. Click on
a topic to have it displayed. Use the Back and Forward buttons to navigate within the
history of viewed topics.
Searching: To quickly locate topics on a particular subject in the documentation, enter a
query in the Search field. Use the Search frame to display the Search view. You can narrow
the scope of your search by selecting only the sections you are interested in.
Synchronizing: After you run a search and find a topic you were looking for, click either the
Refresh / Show Current Topic button or Show in Table of Contents button to match the
navigation tree with the current topic. You might also find it useful to synchronize after
following in-topic links.
Capabilities: To show documentation about capabilities that are disabled in the
application, select the Show All Topics button. When you choose to show all topics in the
table of contents, the headings for documentation about any disabled activities are shown
in the table of contents and also appear in search results.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-37

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

4-38 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Help: About console


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-19. Help: About console

OE9810.0

Notes:
The information this Web page is intended to help you start using the Web-based console,
IBM Systems Director Navigator for i, by providing you with tips on how to work with the
interface. Scrolling to the bottom of this Web page will provide links to additional reference
materials that can be helpful in using this GUI. The links are:
What's new for V7R1: Read about new information for the IBM Systems Director
Navigator for i topic collection.
PDF file for IBM Systems Director Navigator for i: You can view and print a PDF file of
IBM Systems Director Navigator for i information.
Working with IBM Systems Director Navigator for i: Working with IBM Systems Director
Navigator for i helps you work with the Web-enabled System i Navigator tasks, which are
no longer just a set of URL-addressable tasks. However, URL-addressable access is still
available on the System i Navigator tasks on the Web interface.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-39

Instructor Guide

Related information for IBM Systems Director Navigator for i: Other information center
topic collection contains information that relates to the IBM Systems Director Navigator for i
topic collection. You can view or print any of the PDF files.

4-40 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-41

Instructor Guide

Click ? for help


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-20. Click ? for help

OE9810.0

Notes:
To get help on a specific page click the question mark (?) in the upper right of the page to
call up the help function.
From the help page you can click on the links available to get help for specific parameters
on the page.

4-42 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-43

Instructor Guide

Setting startup pages


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-21. Setting startup pages

OE9810.0

Notes:
My Startup Pages: My Startup Pages displays all pages that will be automatically
launched when logging into the console. You can select multiple pages which means
multiple tabs would automatically open when you sign in.
Adding Pages / Setting the Default Startup Page: To add a page to My Startup Pages,
navigate to the desired page and choose "Add to My Startup Pages" from the page actions
drop down menu when viewing the page. To remove a page, select the page in the list and
click "Remove". To specify the page that will be displayed at login time, select "Default".
Any new changes will take effect at the next login.

4-44 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-45

Instructor Guide

Click the twistie for pop-ups


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-22. Click the twistie for pop-ups

OE9810.0

Notes:
When displaying a list of objects, the specific objects will have a twistie that can be used to
display the pop up menu.
In this example we are displaying the option for User jobs that was selected off of the Basic
Operations page.

4-46 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-47

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint
IBM i

1. Which of the following are not a way you can access help on
a Display session?
a. Using F2
b. Using F1
c. Using F4
d. Using F12

2. Help screens are only available when using the Display


session interface.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-23. Checkpoint

OE9810.0

Notes:

4-48 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions
IBM i

1. Which of the following are not a way you can access help on
a Display session?
a. Using F2
b. Using F1
c. Using F4
d. Using F12

2. Help screens are only available when using the Display


session interface.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-49

Instructor Guide

Unit summary
IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:


Explain the different types of online help information displays
and how to access each type from your display station
Explain how to access online help information from System i
Navigator
Explain how to access online help information from Systems
Director Navigator for i
List Web sites that can provide assistance for IBM i users

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 4-24. Unit summary

OE9810.0

Notes:

4-50 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 4. Using online help

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-51

Instructor Guide

4-52 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit 5. Messages
Estimated time
00:30

What this unit is about


This unit discusses working with messages in message queues,
finding additional information about your messages, displaying
messages for the system operator, and displaying and changing
message queues.

What you should be able to do


After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Send messages to other users on the system
Display your messages
Respond to any message needing a response
Explain the concept of a message queue
Perform the tasks listed via your display session, System i
Navigator or Systems Director Navigator for i

How You Will Check Your Progress


During the lecture, you will follow along with the instructor.
During the lab exercise, you will practice your skills by sending and
receiving messages.
Checkpoint questions

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-1

Instructor Guide

How You Will Check Your Progress

5-2

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit objectives
IBM i

After completing this unit, you should be able to:


Send messages to other users on the system
Display your messages
Respond to any message needing a response
Explain the concept of a message queue
Perform the tasks listed through your display session, IBM i
Navigator, or Systems Director Navigator for i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-1. Unit objectives

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-3

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-4

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 5.1: Messaging concepts

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 5-2. Topic 5.1: Messaging concepts

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-5

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-6

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Types of messages
IBM i

No need to
reply

Informational message
Job Inventory List Complete

Inquiry message
===> FRIEDA: Frieda, What in the world is part # 45920AC, " Doughnut hole
size adjustment screw??
From . . . . : Norbert
10/31/XX
23:59:30

You need to
reply

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-3. Types of messages

OE9810.0

Notes:
Messages provide the means of communications between the system and users. In
addition, you can communicate with other users of the system by sending them messages.
There are two types of messages that can be sent on this system, Informational and
Inquiry.
Informational messages are from the system and give you status on what the System
is doing. This type of message does not require a response from you. In many cases,
this type of message is system or application generated.
Inquiry messages can also supply information about the system BUT request a reply.
In some cases, system functions (such as sending data to a printer) may not progress
until an inquiry message receives its reply.
Both of these types of messages can be sent by:
The system
An application program

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-7

Instructor Guide

The system operator


One user to another

5-8

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-9

Instructor Guide

What is a message queue?


IBM i

Message queues are used to


receive and hold messages.

Message
Queue
USER

When a message arrives, a light,


buzzer, or both may be activated
on your workstation.

Message
Queue
WORK
STATION

When you sign on, the following


are assigned to your job:
Your User message queue
Your Workstation message queue

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-4. What is a message queue?

OE9810.0

Notes:
A message queue is like a mail box for messages sent to a user. There are multiple
messages queues on your system:
Each workstation has a message queue with the same name as the device description
name. When a workstation is connected to the system for the first time, the system
automatically creates a workstation message queue.
Each user has a message queue with the same name as the user profile name. When a
new user profile is created on the system, the system automatically creates a user
message queue.
The system operator has a message queue named QSYSOPR that is provided as part
of the OS. When the System is configured for the first time, the system operator queue
is created.

5-10 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-11

Instructor Guide

Where do messages come from?


IBM i

1. Operating System messages


Press Ready or Start on the device PRT01

2. Application program messages


Payroll has been processed

3. System Operator (QSYSOPR or other Q* profile)


4. Other Users
Can you do the accounts receivable on Saturday?
From . . . . : Norbert

10/31/XX

23:59:30

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-5. Where do messages come from?

OE9810.0

Notes:
Both informational or inquiry messages on the system can come from any of the following:
The operating system will send messages when it needs to communicate with the
system operator or system administrator or an end user.
An application can send messages to an end user as a way to communicate information
or to request input from an operator or end user.
The system operator (QSYSOPR) or any of the other user profiles that are
automatically created by the OS, those that begin with a Q, could send messages
Users can communicate with each other

5-12 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-13

Instructor Guide

Topic 5.2:
Working with messages
on a display screen

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 5-6. Topic 5.2: Working with messages on a display screen

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

5-14 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-15

Instructor Guide

The Messages menu


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-7. The Messages menu

OE9810.0

Notes:
There are multiple menus and commands on the system that a user or operator can use to
work with menus.
You can use the GO MESSAGE command to display the menu in the visual. All of the
tasks that relate to messaging can be selected off of this menu. This method requires that
you remember the command within the quotes.
Other alternatives available to you to work with messages are:
If you are working off of the Main help menu, you can select option 1 = User tasks to
display the User tasks menu. The user tasks menu presents options to send a message
or to work with your messages.
If you are working with the Operational Assistant interface (GO ASSIST), you can select
option 3 = Work with messages or option 4 = Send a message.
As you become better acquainted with system commands, you may choose to use
commands rather than the menu interface to work with messages. The commands that
can be entered are:
5-16 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

- SNDMSG the send message command is used to send messages


- SNDBRMSG the send break message command is used to send a break message
to a user who is signed on to a display session
- GO CMDMSG is used to display a list of all of the commands on the system that
deal with messages.
- When entering commands remember you can use the F1 = Help and F4 = Prompt
to assist when using commands.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-17

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-18 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Send a Message
IBM i

From the Operational


Assistant menu, select
option 4 to get this display.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-8. Send a Message

OE9810.0

Notes:
Sending messages with the aid of Operational Assistant is easy. Select option 4 off of this
menu.
As you become better acquainted with system commands, you may choose to use
commands to send your messages.
For example: Type SNDMSG and press the F4 key to obtain a detailed screen for sending
messages. Press the F10 key to see additional parameters. Remember to use the F1 Help
and F4 Prompt to get assistance for the command as well as for each parameter.
During this course, we will use Operational Assistant.
Note to Administrators:
Use GO CMDMSG to see all message-related commands

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-19

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-20 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Receiving messages
IBM i

Messages can be displayed in three ways:


1. Message line (bottom of the display):
Sent by the system or application

2. Break message display (important messages):


Sent by User or System Operator

3. Enter the command to work with messages:


DSPMSG to display messages
WRKMSG to work with messages
WRKMSGQ to work with message queues

4. Choose a menu option to work with messages:


GO ASSIST -> Option 3
Main menu -> Option 3 -> Option 4

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-9. Receiving messages

OE9810.0

Notes:
Note to Administrators:
The System Operator message queue (QSYSOPR) should be monitored daily for:
Critical system messages
Messages regarding system devices
Messages regarding general operations.
Any user with the appropriate authority can access this queue at any time using the
DSPMSG QSYSOPR command.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-21

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-22 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Message line
IBM i

The bottom line of your display


Where the system or an application
program communicates with the user
Tells you about jobs or system status,
user errors, or responses that you make

F3=Exit

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel

F16=Repeat position to

F17=Position to

User profile ROESCH changed.

Message Line
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-10. Message line

OE9810.0

Notes:
The system reserves the bottom line of your display as the message line.
This line is one place where the system or an application program communicates with you
while you are working
The messages you receive on the message line tell you about jobs or system status, user
errors, or responses that you make.
Study Question
What type of message is User profile ROESCH changed?
Do you need to respond?

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-23

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-24 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Break messages
IBM i

Appear directly on your display


Have priority over any other work
you are doing

Interrupted
again

Break
Message

When you receive a break


message:
Your current display is saved, and
the break message display appears.
But I will save
your spot

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-11. Break messages

OE9810.0

Notes:
A message sent to your message queue is usually not displayed automatically. However,
the system operator or another user may choose to send you a break message; for
example to inform you that the System is being taken down and to instruct you to sign off
the system. A break message will interrupt a user that is signed on to a display session and
automatically display the message.
A break message can not be sent to a user who is only signed on to a GUI session.
Note to Administrators:
Use the SNDBRKMSG command to send a break message to a workstation message
queue or all workstation message queues.
Sending a break message using Operational Assist allows you to send a break
message to a particular user, a list of users, or all signed on users.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-25

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-26 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Work with Messages display


IBM i

Messages in your user message queue and your workstation message


queue can be viewed from the Work with Messages display.
All messages are held in your message queue until you delete them.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-12. Work with Messages display

OE9810.0

Notes:
To get to the screen displayed type GO ASSIST on a command line then select Option 3
from the Operational Assistant menu.
If you choose to use commands, you can also display your messages by:
Using the Display Messages (DSPMSG) command.
Using the Work with Messages (WRKMSG) command.
To print the messages in a message queue use the Work with Messages (WRKMSG)
command as follows:
WRKMSG MSGQ(msgqname) OUTPUT(*PRINT)
Note to Administrators:
Every message has a message ID, for example, CPF1234.
There is no message manual for the system.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-27

Instructor Guide

You can display the message text for any system message using the DSPMSGD
(Display Message Description) command.
- For example, to find the message text for CPF1234 type DSPMSGD CPF1234 and
press the Enter key.

5-28 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-29

Instructor Guide

Replying to an inquiry message


IBM i

From another user


5

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-13. Replying to an inquiry message

OE9810.0

Notes:
1. From the Operational Assistant menu select option 3 to work with messages.
2. Find the message that requires a reply and type a 5 under the Option column to the left
of the message and press Enter.
3. Type your reply to the inquiry message then press Enter to send your reply.

5-30 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-31

Instructor Guide

Replying to system messages


IBM i

Opt

You
need
to
reply

Message

Messages Needing Reply

End of forms on the printer PRT01.

( C

PAGE

Additional Message Information


Message ID . . . . . . . . . :
CPA5335
Date sent. . . . . . . . . . :
11/21/XX
Time 08:09:00
C -- To cancel the printer writer,
1. Press Stop only if Start and Stop are two separate keys.
2. Load the new forms.
3. Press Cancel.
4. Press Stop and Start, or press Start/Stop.
5. Type a C.
H -- To hold the file,
1. Press Stop only if Start and Stop are two separate keys.
Type reply below, then press Enter
More. . .
Reply. . . . . ___________________________________________

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-14. Replying to system messages

OE9810.0

Notes:
It is common to receive inquiry system message about printers. The system needs you to
take an action (such as loading paper in the printer) and will wait for you to complete the
action and respond to the message before printing continues.
System messages have standard reply values, one of which you must take to answer the
message. For example:
Option C generally Cancels: Select this option when you want the system to stop
attempting the operation that generated the message.
Option R generally Retries: Select this option after you have fixed the error condition
and want the system to restart the operation that generated the message.

5-32 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-33

Instructor Guide

Deleting messages
IBM i

To delete a single message:


Type Option 4 (remove) on the option line
preceding the message you want to delete

Press Enter

To delete all messages that do not require a reply, press F16.


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-15. Deleting messages

OE9810.0

Notes:

5-34 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-35

Instructor Guide

Message delivery modes


IBM i

Delivery modes determine how you are notified of messages.


The delivery modes available are:
Notify
Break
Hold
Default

Notify
Break
Hold
Default

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-16. Message delivery modes

OE9810.0

Notes:
You can specify your message delivery mode by changing your message queue as follows:
Type CHGMSGQ (change message queue) on any command line and press the F4 key to
receive prompting. (Prompting tells you what parameters to use with the command.)
The CHGMSGQ command has two key parameters:
The name of the message queue you are changing (usually the same as your user
profile name)
The delivery mode; the way in which your messages will be delivered.
The options you can specify for delivery mode are:
Notify lets you know when a message arrives on your message queue by turning on
your Message Waiting light and buzzing your display station. (This is the normal way.)
Break interrupts your work by displaying messages immediately after they are received
by your message queue. Even if the messages sent to your message queue are not
break messages.
5-36 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Hold stops the system from notifying you that you have a message on your message
queue.
Default answers any message requiring a reply with the default reply set up for the
message. Information-only messages are ignored.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-37

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-38 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 5.3: Working with messages through


System i Navigator

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 5-17. Topic 5.3: Working with messages through System i Navigator

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-39

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-40 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Work with messages


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-18. Work with messages

OE9810.0

Notes:
Messages are displayed in a specific order:
Unanswered inquiry messages
Senders copy of messages requiring a reply
Messages not requiring a reply
From this pop up menu you have options to
Reply to a message
Send a message
Delete a message

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-41

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-42 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Message: Properties
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-19. Message: Properties

OE9810.0

Notes:
The Message Properties will allow you to see the entire message as well as provide the
details about a message, such as how old the message is, the severity of the message
(importance), and where the message originated.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-43

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-44 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Send a message
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-20. Send a message

OE9810.0

Notes:
System i Navigator has several ways to send messages.
Probably the easiest way to use the Message function is under Basic Operations.
Right-click and select Send Message to see the display on the next page.
Use the Send Message dialog to send a message to either:
One or more users, or
One or more workstation message queues.
You have the additional options of requesting a reply (in which case you will send an inquiry
message) and interrupting a user in an emulation session (in which case you will send a
break message).
Note: A break message will not be shown for a user on a GUI, for example, System i
Navigator session or a Systems Director Navigator for i session.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-45

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-46 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Displaying system operator messages


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-21. Displaying system operator messages

OE9810.0

Notes:
You can also use the Include function to choose a different message queue. For example
use the Include function to display the messages in the system operator (QSYSOPR)
message queue.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-47

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-48 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 5.4: Working with messages through


Systems Director Navigator for i

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 5-22. Topic 5.4: Working with messages through Systems Director Navigator for i

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-49

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-50 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Work with messages


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-23. Work with messages

OE9810.0

Notes:
When you click on messages the system will show you the messages in your message
queue, in this example user OE9801 is signed on and we are now looking at the OE9801
message queue.
Messages are displayed in a specific order:
Unanswered inquiry messages
Senders copy of messages requiring a reply
Messages not requiring a reply
From this pop up menu you have options to:
Reply to a message
Send a message
Delete a message

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-51

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-52 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Message: Properties
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-24. Message: Properties

OE9810.0

Notes:
The Message Properties will allow you to see the entire message as well as provide the
details about a message, such as how old the message is, the severity of the message
(importance), and where the message originated.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-53

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-54 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Send a message
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-25. Send a message

OE9810.0

Notes:
To send a message click Send a Messages function on the Basic Operations page to see
the Send Message page.
Use the Send Message page to send a message to either:
One or more users, or
One or more workstation message queues.
You have the additional options of requesting a reply (in which case you will send an inquiry
message) and interrupting a user in an emulation session (in which case you will send a
break message).
Note: A break message will not be shown for a user on a GUI, for example, System i
Navigator session or a Systems Director Navigator for i session.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-55

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-56 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Displaying system operator messages


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-26. Displaying system operator messages

OE9810.0

Notes:
As we saw previously when you click on Messages the system will show you the messages
in your message queue by default.
You can use the Include function to choose a different message queue. For example use
the Include function to display the messages for the system operator which will then display
the messages in the QSYSOPR message queue.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-57

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-58 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Checkpoint (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. Each user has a mailbox (a message queue) with the same


name as his or her user profile name.
a. True
b. False

2. Which message type has the highest priority?


a. Break
b. Informational
c. System
d. User

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-27. Checkpoint (1 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-59

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. Each user has a mailbox (a message queue) with the same


name as his or her user profile name.
a. True
b. False

2. Which message type has the highest priority?


a.
b.
c.
d.

Break
Informational
System
User

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

5-60 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Checkpoint (2 of 3)
IBM i

3. Which of the following is not a valid delivery mode for a


message?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Default
Notify
Hold
Break
System

4. When using System i Navigator, the message function is


found under what tab?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Work Management
Configuration and Service
Security
Basic Operations
Users and Groups
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-28. Checkpoint (2 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-61

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 3)
IBM i

3. Which of the following is not a valid delivery mode for a


message?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Default
Notify
Hold
Break
System

4. When using System i Navigator, the message function is


found under what tab?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Work Management
Configuration and Service
Security
Basic Operations
Users and Groups
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

5-62 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Checkpoint (3 of 3)
IBM i

5. Break messages can be sent to users signed on through one


of the graphical interfaces.
a. True
b. False

6. When using System i Navigator or Systems Director


Navigator for i, it is possible to display only your messages.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-29. Checkpoint (3 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-63

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (3 of 3)
IBM i

5. Break messages can be sent to users signed on through one


of the graphical interfaces.
a. True
b. False

6. When using System i Navigator or Systems Director


Navigator for i, it is possible to display only your messages.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

5-64 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Exercise 2: Online help and messages


IBM i

Please complete
Exercise 2
Online help and
messages

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-30. Exercise 2: Online help and messages

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-65

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-66 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit summary
IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:


Send messages to other users on the system
Display your messages
Respond to any message needing a response
Explain the concept of a message queue
Perform the tasks listed through your display session, System i
Navigator, or Systems Director Navigator for i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 5-31. Unit summary

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010


Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.

Unit 5. Messages

5-67

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

5-68 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit 6. Using CL commands


Estimated time
00:45

What this unit is about


As you gain more experience with the IBM i, you may wish to learn
how to use system commands known as Command Language (CL)
commands. Depending on your user profile, you may or may not have
the ability to directly control the system by entering CL commands.
Your productivity working with the system can be enhanced if you use
CL commands since they are faster to use than menus. In this unit you
will learn the basic structure of commands

What you should be able to do


After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Find CL commands
Explain the basic structure of CL commands
Explain the use of command parameters
Enter commands
Use command prompting

How You Will Check Your Progress


During the lecture, you will follow along with the instructor.
During the lab exercise, you will practice your skills by using
commands to create a library.
Checkpoint questions

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-1

Instructor Guide

Unit objectives
IBM i

After completing this unit, you should be able to:


Find CL commands
Explain the basic structure of CL commands
Explain the use of command parameters
Enter commands
Use command prompting

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-1. Unit objectives

OE9810.0

Notes:

6-2

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-3

Instructor Guide

Topic 6.1: Using CL commands


through a display session

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 6-2. Topic 6.1: Using CL commands through a display session

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

6-4

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-5

Instructor Guide

Where to find commands


IBM i

Cursor on any command line, press

F4

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-3. Where to find commands

OE9810.0

Notes:
There are several ways to find commands on the system.
Move your cursor to the command line (located at the bottom of the screen) and press
the F4 key.
Type a question mark (?) on the command line and press enter.
Type GO MAJOR on the command line and press enter.
The Major Command Group menu shows a list of major command groups. To the right of
each menu option is the name of the menu or the command that is displayed when that
particular menu option is selected.
By using the GO CL command you can go directly to any of these menus. There are many
such command listing menus on the IBM i. Try using these commands to increase your
knowledge of CL commands. For example:
GO CMDSEC to see all of the security commands
GO CMDOUTQ to see all of the output queue commands
6-6

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

GO CMDJOB to see all of the job commands


Note:
Refer to Appendix B for a list of some of the more commonly used commands.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-7

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-8

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

CL structure
IBM i

Each CL command is made up of two parts:


Command name
Parameters

Parameters

Command
Name
Action

The command names are abbreviations


depicting an Action and an object:

Command
Name
Action

Display Library

DSPLIB

Create Physical File

CRTPF

Add Job Queue Entry

ADDJOBQE

Work with Message Queue

WRKMSGQ

Keyword and
Value

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-4. CL structure

OE9810.0

Notes:
Every CL command consists of an action and an item.
For example: DSPLIB (display a library)
DSP is the action - Display
LIB is the item - Library
Once you learn how to spell the various action and item abbreviations, you can try putting
them together to learn more commands. For example, knowing how to abbreviate the
action Create (CRT) and the item Library (LIB), you now know the command to Create a
Library - CRTLIB.
One action to remember in particular is Work with, abbreviated as WRK. The Work with
commands can provide a very efficient way to manage IBM i items.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-9

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-10 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Parameters
IBM i

Parameters allow you to be specific, or to customize what it is


you want the command to do.
Each parameter is made up of a keyword and its value.

Command
CRTLIB

LIB(smith)

Parameter
LIB(smith)

CRTLIB
Parameters

Action

Object

Keyword

Value

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-5. Parameters

OE9810.0

Notes:
Parameters enable you to be specific about or customize what you want your commands to
do. If you recall, the DSPLIB command enables you to display a library. One of the
parameters for this command is the OUTPUT parameter. OUTPUT is the keyword for this
parameter. This parameter enables you to specify whether you want the library displayed
on your screen or in a spool file to be printed.
It is the value of the parameter that affects how the command runs and what it does. For
example:
To display a library on your screen, the value of the OUTPUT parameter is *.
To display a library in a spool file to be printed, the value of the OUTPUT parameter is
*PRINT.
Each parameter has a keyword associated with it. You may like to think of the keyword as
the name of the parameter.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-11

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-12 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

More on values
IBM i

The values of a parameter can be:


User-defined
System-defined
System-defined values have an * ASTERISK as their first
character.
The following example of the CRTLIB command shows both
types of parameter values.

CRTLIB

LIB(MYLIB)

TYPE(*TEST)

User-defined

System-defined

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-6. More on values

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-13

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-14 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Required and optional parameters


IBM i

Some parameters must be specified; these are required.


Other parameters have default values; these are optional.

If you enter: CRTLIB LIB(MYLIB), then press the Enter key;


it is the same as: CRTLIB LIB(MYLIB) TYPE(*PROD) TEXT(*BLANK)

Because......

TYPE(*PROD) TEXT(*BLANK)

... are the default values for those


optional parameters

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-7. Required and optional parameters

OE9810.0

Notes:
The IBM i highlights required parameters and issues a message if required parameters are
omitted.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-15

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-16 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Where to enter a CL command


IBM i

Menu Command Line


Most menus have a line reserved for entering commands
Selection or command
===>
________________________________
CRTLIB LIB(MYLIB)
___________________________________________________________________________________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F9=Retrieve
F12=Cancel
F13=Information Assistant
F23=Set initial menu

F4

Provides assistance with parameters

F9

Retrieve previously entered commands

Help
F1

Do not forget to use Help; it makes life


much easier.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-8. Where to enter a CL command

OE9810.0

Notes:
Most menus have a command line as part of the menu and is located at the bottom of the
screen. This command line can be used to enter CL commands.
If you know the command you wish to use, simply enter it on this line and press F4 to
obtain command prompting. The system will present you with a display screen showing
possible parameters for the command. If there are any parameters with which you are not
familiar, move the cursor to that parameter. Then press either the Help (F1) key or the
prompt (F4) key or both.
Pressing the Help key will provide you with an explanation of what the parameter does.
Pressing the F4 key will list the possible values, including system-defined values that
can be entered for the parameter.
If you are entering many commands over and over again, you may find the F9 key a real
time saver. Pressing F9 will retrieve the command previously issued. In fact, by pressing F9
many times, you can retrieve all CL commands entered since you signed on.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-17

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-18 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

The Command Entry display


IBM i

This display shows you all the commands you have entered
from the time you have signed on.
On any command line type
CALL QCMD
to get this display.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-9. The Command Entry display

OE9810.0

Notes:
The Command Entry display:
Is specifically designed for entering commands
Allows you to:
- Enter commands efficiently.
- View previously entered commands and retrieve them from the list.
To retrieve a specific command move the cursor to the desired command and
press F9.
- Find all messages that have been issued for your job.
The greatest advantage to the Command Entry screen is that you can view all the
commands you have entered since you last signed on and retrieve a specific command
directly.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-19

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-20 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Entering commands using prompting


IBM i

No need to remember
F4

All the command keywords (name of a


parameter)
The values allowed for a parameter
The sequence of the parameters

Each command has an entry display to


assist you
To get prompting for the Creating Library
command:
Type CRTLIB on the command line, then
press F4.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-10. Entering commands using prompting

OE9810.0

Notes:
As your experience level improves, you may not need to use command prompting as often.
However, even the most experienced IBM i users often rely on prompting. Why try to
remember long commands and parameter values when the system will do that for you?
As stated earlier, if you are not sure which parameters to use, just type the CL command
for example, DSPLIB on the command line and press the F4 key.
The system will present you with a display screen showing possible parameters for the
command.
If there are any parameters with which you are not familiar, move the cursor to that
parameter. Now you can press either the Help key or the F4 key or both.
- Pressing the Help key will provide you with an explanation of what the parameter
does.
- Pressing the F4 key will list the possible values, including system-defined values,
that can be entered for the parameter.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-21

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-22 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

CRTLIB command prompting


IBM i

Your choice

Default values
By default descriptions are shown
To see keywords press F11
To find out the difference between
*PROD and *TEST, place cursor on the
library type parameter and press the
Help key.

Help
F1

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-11. CRTLIB command prompting

OE9810.0

Notes:
To get to this screen, type CRTLIB at a command line and then press the F4 key.
The advantages of letting the IBM i help you in this way include:
You do not have to remember all the parameters.
The initial required parameters are displayed and highlighted.
Press F10, Additional parameters, to see any additional parameters for this CL
command.
The default parameter values are provided.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-23

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-24 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Entering commands in free format


IBM i

Prompting may not be necessary for commands that are used


often
The correct form is:
Space between parameters
Parentheses around values (user or system defined)
No space between a parameter and its value
No need to enter parameters with default values
CRTLIB

LIB(MYLIB) TYPE(*TEST)

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-12. Entering commands in free format

OE9810.0

Notes:
As you use certain commands and parameters over and over again, you begin to
remember the order and values for parameters. For these commands, you will find it more
efficient to simply type the command and parameters at a command line and press Enter.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-25

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-26 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Keywords are optional


IBM i

You can specify the value for each parameter without typing in
the keywords, as long as you respect the order of the
parameters.

CRTLIB
CRTLIB
CRTLIB

LIB(MYLIB) TYPE(*TEST)
TYPE(*TEST) LIB(MYLIB)
mylib *test

CRTLIB

*test mylib

F4

Are all Valid

This is not Valid

It is always best to start with prompting.


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-13. Keywords are optional

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-27

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-28 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 6.2: Using CL commands


through System i Navigator

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 6-14. Topic 6.2: Using CL commands through System i Navigator

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-29

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-30 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Verify Management Central server


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-15. Verify Management Central server

OE9810.0

Notes:
When running commands via System i Navigator, the first step is to verify that the
Management Central server is set correctly. Commands will be submitted to run off of the
management central server. So you will need to verify that this value is set to the correct
system and that you have a valid user id and password on that system. Check with your
system administrator if your current value is set to a system other than the system on which
the command will be run.
The steps to set the management central server are:
Open System i Navigator.
Highlight and right click Management Central (the top branch in the left pane)
On the pop up menu select and click Change central system
Click the down arrow and select the system to be set as your management central
server system
These steps will prepare the management central server. Continue with the steps on the
next visual to actually run a CL command.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-31

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-32 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Running a command
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-16. Running a command

OE9810.0

Notes:
The steps to run a command with System i Navigator are:
Open System i Navigator.
Sign on to your system.
Right-click your system.
Choose Run command from the pop-up menu.
You may be prompted:
- To sign on to the central server; if so enter a valid user id and password.
- With the informational window displayed in the visual, if so click OK

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-33

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-34 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Entering a command
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-17. Entering a command

OE9810.0

Notes:
Enter the command in the input field.
If you know the format, you can type in the full CL command with all of the parameters
and user values.
But if you do not know the format for the command, then you can type in the CL
command then press the Prompt button to call up the panel on the next page
At this point you will see the GUI version of prompted CL command screen. Fill in the
required information. Remember that you are allowed to use both help and prompting for
each parameter in question.
Once all of the parameters have been filled in, click OK to display the panel on the next
visual.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-35

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-36 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Submitting the command


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-18. Submitting the command

OE9810.0

Notes:
Once the CL command and all of its parameters are specified:
Click OK to run immediately or you can schedule a date and time for the command to
run.
If you click OK, you will see the pop-up message panel in the visual (# 1). Review the
information on this panel and click OK.
This will open a status window (# 2) that will show the status of your job, initially it will
say running.
Once the job has completed you will see the status change (# 3).
When your job has completed then you can close the status window.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-37

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-38 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Task Activity: Run Command


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-19. Task Activity: Run Command

OE9810.0

Notes:
You can also check the status of your job by:
1. Expanding Management Central, you may be prompted for user id and password.
2. Expand Task activity
3. Click Commands to see information for your command in the right pane
4. Once your command has completed successfully you can right click and Delete this
entry. Notice the other options that are available on the pop up menu.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-39

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-40 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Finding a command (1 of 2)
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-20. Finding a command (1 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:
If you are not sure of the spelling for a command, prompting is available.
In this example the user has keyed in DSP*, then clicked Prompt.
From the pop-up panel you can select the command you want to run, and click OK button.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-41

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-42 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Finding a command (2 of 2)
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-21. Finding a command (2 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:
Another function that is available through the System i Navigator is the ability to recall
commands that have previously been entered from your PC. Note that you can specify how
much history is collected on your PC, the default is to save the past 20 commands.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-43

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-44 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 6.3: Using CL commands through


Systems Director Navigator for i

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 6-22. Topic 6.3: Using CL commands through Systems Director Navigator for i

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-45

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-46 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Running a command
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-23. Running a command

OE9810.0

Notes:
The steps to run a command with Systems Director Navigator for i are:
Open a Web browser and start a connection to Systems Director Navigator for i
Sign on to your system.
Open the System page
Choose Run command to see the Web page on the next page in the student guide

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-47

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-48 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Enter command: Prompt


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-24. Enter command: Prompt

OE9810.0

Notes:
Enter the command in the input field.
If you know the format, you can type in the full CL command with all of the parameters
and user values.
If you do not know the format for the command, then you can type in the CL command
then press Prompt button to call up the Web page in the lower right corner
At this point you will see the GUI version of prompted CL command screen. Fill in the
required information.
Once all of the parameters have been filled in, click OK to display the panel on the next
page.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-49

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-50 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Entering a command
IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-25. Entering a command

OE9810.0

Notes:
Once the CL command is ready to be run, click Run Command.
Once the command has been processed you will see the message displayed on the Web
page (see the screen capture in the lower right).
Close this page when you are done processing your command.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-51

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-52 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Checkpoint (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. What is the easiest way to find a command you need?


a. Press F1 on any screen.
b. Press F4 with the cursor on the command line.
c. Press F1 with the cursor on the command line.
d. Press F4 with the cursor in any position on the screen.

2. Some CL commands have default values for parameter


entries.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-26. Checkpoint (1 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-53

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. What is the easiest way to find a command you need?


a. Press F1 on any screen.
b. Press F4 with the cursor on the command line.
c. Press F1 with the cursor on the command line.
d. Press F4 with the cursor in any position on the screen.
2. Some CL commands have default values for parameter entries.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

6-54 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Checkpoint (2 of 3)
IBM i

3. Match the purpose of the function key with the correct key.
F1

1. Retrieve commands

F4

2. Help

F9

3. Provides assistance with commands

a. F1 = 2, F4 = 1, F9 = 3
b. F1 = 2, F4 = 3, F9 = 1
c. F1 = 3, F4 = 2, F9 = 1
d. F1 = 1, F4 = 3, F9 = 2

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-27. Checkpoint (2 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-55

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 3)
IBM i

3. Match the purpose of the function key with the correct key.
F1

1. Retrieve commands

F4

2. Help

F9

3. Provides assistance with commands

a. F1 = 2, F4 = 1, F9 = 3
b. F1 = 2, F4 = 3, F9 = 1
c. F1 = 3, F4 = 2, F9 = 1
d. F1 = 1, F4 = 3, F9 = 2

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

6-56 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Checkpoint (3 of 3)
IBM i

4. When using F4 for command assistance, all values are


displayed, including default values.
a. True
b. False

5. When using System i Navigator to run a command, you can


use F4 to display all the parameters.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-28. Checkpoint (3 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-57

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (3 of 3)
IBM i

4. When using F4 for command assistance, all values are


displayed, including default values.
a. True
b. False

5. When using System i Navigator to run a command, you can


use F4 to display all the parameters.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

6-58 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Exercise 3: Command entry


IBM i

Please complete
Exercise 3
Command entry

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-29. Exercise 3: Command entry

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-59

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-60 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit summary
IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:


Find CL commands
Explain the basic structure of CL commands
Explain the use of command parameters
Enter commands
Use command prompting

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 6-30. Unit summary

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 6. Using CL commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-61

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

6-62 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit 7. Managing objects


Estimated time
00:30

What this unit is about


In this unit, we will see how objects are stored on the IBM i. We will
also explain what a library is and how the library list is used to locate
objects on the system.

What you should be able to do


After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Explain what is considered an object
Explain the purpose served by a Library
Explain how the system locates objects
Explain the difference between a simple name and a fully qualified
name
Explain the function served by a library list
Explain how library lists are created
Describe the different ways to locate objects on the system

How You Will Check Your Progress


During the lecture, you will follow along with the instructor.
During the lab exercise, you will practice your skills by using
commands to locate objects.
Checkpoint questions.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-1

Instructor Guide

Unit objectives
IBM i

After completing this unit, you should be able to:


Explain what is considered an object
Explain the purpose served by a library
Explain how the system locates objects
Explain the difference between a simple name and a fully
qualified name
Explain the function served by a library list
Explain how library lists are created
Describe the different ways to locate objects on the system

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-1. Unit objectives

OE9810.0

Notes:

7-2

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-3

Instructor Guide

Topic 7.1:
Managing objects
through a display session

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 7-2. Topic 7.1:Managing objects through a display session

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

7-4

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-5

Instructor Guide

What are objects?


IBM i

Objects are named units that occupy space in storage upon


which operations can be performed.
Mary Smith
User profile

Examples:
File
Library

Message
queues

Tape
file

Program
Command
Queue

Library MYLIB
with objects
books

Program

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-3. What are objects?

OE9810.0

Notes:
Anything that lives in the System is a object. Some examples of objects that live in the
system are; files, libraries, programs, commands, message queues, and so forth.
You may like to think of an object as a box with a packing slip. There are contents within the
box as well as a packing slip that describes the box. Objects contain both data and
attributes, which describe the object. Object attributes include the name, type, size,
creation date of the object, and the name of user profile who created the object. Security
attributes also exist identifying which user profiles can access the object and what type of
access these users have to that object. IBM i security makes it so that not all users can use
every object on the IBM i.
Note to Administrators:
The command used to display an object's attributes is DSPOBJD.

7-6

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-7

Instructor Guide

Libraries
IBM i

A library is an object used to


group related objects and to find
objects by name.

MYLIB
LIBRARY

Libraries are used to organize:

Prog1

For security
For backup
Tape
file

By applications
By object type

File 1

PayDay
Mary Smith
User profile

By use:
Production versus

Message
queues

Test

MSGQ1

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-4. Libraries

OE9810.0

Notes:
A library is a directory to objects. In fact, the library provides the address of a given object.
The system cannot locate any object unless it uses the library to find the objects address
first.
You may like to think of a library like a directory on PC file systems. There is one major
difference; unlike PC directories, the system does not allow you to create libraries within
libraries.
The security officer or the system administrator will define the list of libraries you can
access.
Objects are grouped together in libraries according to security requirements, processing
requirements, end user requirements, and so forth.
Note to Administrators:
In addition to the traditional IBM i library and object file system, IBM i also supports what
is essentially a PC directory and file system. This enables the IBM i to be used as a PC
file server, a www server, a Lotus Domino server, and other applications. These PC
7-8

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

directories combined with the IBM i library and object file system and other file systems
make up what is called the Integrated File System or IFS.
Perhaps the easiest way to see all of the IFS is to use IBM i Access for Windows on a
PC client. This client software will show all directories in the IBM i IFS using Windows
Explorer. Using this client software, new IFS PC directories can be created and files
from your PC can be easily uploaded to and accessed from the IBM i disk.
CL commands to work with IFS directories include the MKDIR command which creates
a new IFS directory and the WRKLNK command which shows all directories in the IFS.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-9

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-10 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Simple name versus qualified name


IBM i

Simple name

PAYDAY

Qualified name

PAYLIB/PAYDAY

PayLIB

Library
Name

Object
Name

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-5. Simple name versus qualified name

OE9810.0

Notes:
The qualified object name is simply the object name qualified or further described by its
library name.
When referring to an object's qualified object name, it is written as follows:
Library Name/Object Name
Note that it is possible to have objects on the system with the same name and type. In
order to use a specific object, you need to identify its library.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-11

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-12 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Library list
IBM i

QSYS
QSYS2

IBM-supplied

QHLPSYS
QUSRSYS

+
MARYLIB
+

Mary Smith
Programmer

MARYLIB
*CURLIB

QGPL

*USRLIBL

QTEMP

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-6. Library list

OE9810.0

Notes:
When you sign on the system, you will have a list of libraries called a library list associated
with your active session, properly known as your interactive job.
The library list has a system portion and a user portion. Use the DSPLIBL command to see
your library list. Your system administrator can tailor your library list to include libraries that
you need to access regularly.
Note to Administrators:
The system portion of the library list is specified in the system value QSYSLIBL. It is
unlikely that you will need to change this value but if you do need to make a change
then you will use the CHGSYSVAL QSYSLIBL command.
The default user portion of the library list is specified in system value QUSRLIBL but
can be individually specified for each user. This is done using an object called a job
description.
- Every new job obtains job attributes including the library list from a job description.
- Job descriptions are created with the CRTJOBD command.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-13

Instructor Guide

- For interactive jobs you specify the job description you wish to use in the user
profile.
- For batch jobs the job description is specified in the SBMJOB command.
- To see the job descriptions currently being used by your jobs use the WRKACTJOB
command, then choose the option to work with the job's definition attributes.
A user's current library is set in the user profile. This library will be used to store any
object created by the user unless the user specifies a specific library when they are
creating an object.

7-14 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-15

Instructor Guide

Finding an object
IBM i

Library
List

QSYS
QSYS2
QHLPSYS
QUSRSYS
MARYLIB
QGPL
QTEMP
PayLIB
NEWLIB

MARYLIB
Message
Queues

PAYLIB

CALL BOOKPROG
CALL PAYLIB/BOOKPROG
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-7. Finding an object

OE9810.0

Notes:
The library list will be used to find an object when you refer to an object on the system
without referring to that object's library name,. The list will be searched from the top to the
bottom. The first library within that list that is found to contain the object will be used to
provide the address of the object.
In this example:
If you enter CALL BOOKPROG:
- The system will stop searching when it finds a program named BOOKPROG that
exists in library MARYLIB.
- BOOKPROG in MARYLIB will be the program that is called.
But, if you enter CALL PAYLIB/BOOKPROG the system will use program BOOKPROG
in PAYLIB since this library name was explicitly specified.
Hence, the library list is simply a convenience. You can avoid specifying library names
when referring to objects as long as the library containing the object is in your library list.

7-16 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

You can always access any object in any library, assuming you have the correct security
authorization, by explicitly specifying the library name.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-17

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-18 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Locating an object
IBM i

To get to this screen, enter WRKOBJ +

F4

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-8. Locating an object

OE9810.0

Notes:
Use the WRKOBJ command to find an object on the system.
Simply enter the object name you wish to find. If you wish to search all libraries on the
system specify *ALL for the Library parameter.
Lets try to find an object called QDFTJOBD, which is a job description type of object.
How many did you find? _____________
In what library was this object located? _______________________________
What is the object type? ________________________

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-19

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-20 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 7.2: Managing objects through


System i Navigator

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 7-9. Topic 7.2: Managing objects through System i Navigator

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-21

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-22 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

File Systems: Integrated File System


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-10. File Systems: Integrated File System

OE9810.0

Notes:
File Systems are a part of IBM i that supports stream input and output and storage
management similar to the personal computer and UNIX operating systems. They also
provide a similar hierarchical directory structure.
Click File Systems to display a list of all file systems to which you are authorized.
You can access IBM i objects by specifying the path through the directories to the object.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-23

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-24 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Integrated File System: QSYS.LIB


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-11. Integrated File System: QSYS.LIB

OE9810.0

Notes:
To display the screen in the upper left part of the visual:
1. Expand File systems
2. Expands IFS
3. Expand QSYS.LIB file system to see a list of all of the libraries (both IBM and User
libraries) on your system
4. Click QSYS.LIB file system to see the information in the right pane.
- The default is to show all objects stored in the QSYS library that are type *.LIB
- You can use the INCLUDE function to show a list of other types of objects that are
stored in the QSYS library
When you click the plus sign (+) to expand a library (in this example OE98V10LIB, in the
lower right screen capture) left frame, it displays a list of files in that library.
But when you click the library itself, a complete list of all the object in the libraries displays
in the right frame.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-25

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-26 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Menu options for different object types


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-12. Menu options for different object types

OE9810.0

Notes:
Notice that when you right-click an object, the options available on the pop-up menu vary
based on the type of object.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-27

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-28 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 7.3: Managing objects through


Systems Director Navigator for i

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 7-13. Topic 7.3: Managing objects through Systems Director Navigator for i

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-29

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-30 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

File systems: Integrated File System QSYS.LIB


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-14. File systems: Integrated File System QSYS.LIB

OE9810.0

Notes:
File Systems are a part of IBM i that supports stream input and output and storage
management similar to the personal computer and UNIX operating systems. They also
provide a similar hierarchical directory structure.
The steps to manage objects with Systems Director Navigator for i are:
1. Open a Web browser and start a connection to Systems Director Navigator for i
2. Sign on to your system.
3. Open the File systems page
4. Choose Integrated file systems to see the Web page in the lower right corner
5. Choose the file system you want to explore; in this example QSYS.LIB
6. Click the twistie to see the pop up menu
7. Choose Open on the pop up menu to see the visual on the next page

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-31

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-32 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Find and open your library


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-15. Find and open your library

OE9810.0

Notes:
1. Choosing the path in the previous visual shows the panel on this page; you will see a
list of the libraries in the QSYS library
2. Page down until you find your schema, in this example OE98V10LIB
3. Click the twistie to see the pop up menu
4. Click Open on the pop up menu to see the next visual

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-33

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-34 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Menu options for different object types


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-16. Menu options for different object types

OE9810.0

Notes:
1. Choosing the path in the previous visual shows the panel on this page.
2. You will see a complete list of all the objects in the schema.
3. Notice that when you click the twistie for an object, the options available on the pop-up
menu vary, based on the type of object. For example:
a. An object of type program, in the upper left screen capture, versus
b. An object of type file, in the lower right screen capture
4. You can either click Close button to close this page or click the X on the tab to close
this page

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-35

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-36 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Checkpoint (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. Which of the following is not an object on the IBM i?


a. Files
b. Programs
c. Commands
d. Record
e. Libraries

2. Which of the following is a valid use of a library?


a. A library is an object used to store applications.
b. A library is an object used to store production data.
c. A library is an object used to store security information.
d. All the above are valid use of a library.
e. None of the above is a valid use of a library.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-17. Checkpoint (1 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-37

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. Which of the following is not an object on the IBM i?


a. Files
b. Programs
c. Commands
d. Record
e. Libraries

2. Which of the following is a valid use of a library?


a. A library is an object used to store applications.
b. A library is an object used to store production data.
c. A library is an object used to store security information.
d. All the above are valid use of a library.
e. None of the above is a valid use of a library.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

7-38 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Checkpoint (2 of 3)
IBM i

3. Each user can have a list of libraries assigned; this list can
be customized for each user.
a. True
b. False

4. Which of the following is a correct statement regarding a


library list?
a. The library list is only used to find application programs.
b. The library list is searched from the top to the bottom when
searching for an object.
c. A library list cannot be configured for a specific user.
d. Using the command DSPLIBL only shows IBM-supplied libraries.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-18. Checkpoint (2 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-39

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 3)
IBM i

3. Each user can have a list of libraries assigned; this list can
be customized for each user.
a. True
b. False

4. Which of the following is a correct statement regarding a


library list?
a. The library list is only used to find application programs.
b. The library list is searched from the top to the bottom when
searching for an object.
c. A library list cannot be configured for a specific user.
d. Using the command DSPLIBL only shows IBM-supplied libraries.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

7-40 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Checkpoint (3 of 3)
IBM i

5. When using the GUI, you can use the IFS as a way to find
objects on the system.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-19. Checkpoint (3 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-41

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (3 of 3)
IBM i

5. When using the GUI, you can use the IFS as a way to find
objects on the system.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

7-42 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Exercise 4: Object management


IBM i

Please complete
Exercise 4
Object management

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-20. Exercise 4: Object management

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-43

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-44 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit summary
IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to explain the


following:
Explain what is considered an object
Explain the purpose served by a library
Explain how the system locates objects
Explain the difference between a simple name and a fully
qualified name
Explain the function served by a library list
Explain how library lists are created
Describe the different ways to locate objects on the system

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 7-21. Unit summary

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 7. Managing objects

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-45

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

7-46 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit 8. Managing your work


Estimated time
00:30

What this unit is about


When you sign on to the system and run programs, you are performing
work on the system. In this unit you learn will learn the character that
the system keeps track of the work it must perform by dividing that
work into individual units known as jobs. In this unit you will learn that
there are interactive jobs and batch jobs. Many of your application
menu options start new batch jobs on the system. In this unit you will
learn how to monitor the jobs that are run on the system and ensure
that they complete as desired.
You will also learn how printing is managed on the system and how to
manage your printed reports to ensure that they print on the desired
printer.

What you should be able to do


After completing this unit, you should be able to:
List the types of jobs that can run on the system
Describe the difference between a batch and an interactive job
Identify the stages of a batch job
Execute the command to display your jobs
Execute the command to display all active jobs
Explain how to control jobs on the system
Execute the command to view your spool files
Control printer output on the system
Perform all of these tasks through a display session as well as
using System i Navigator and Systems Director Navigator for i

How You Will Check Your Progress


During the lecture, you will follow along with the instructor.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-1

Instructor Guide

During the lab exercise, you will practice your skills by using menus
and commands to submit a batch job and monitor it as it goes
through the various job stages.
Checkpoint questions.

8-2

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit objectives
IBM i

After completing this unit, you should be able to:


List the types of jobs that can run on the system
Describe the difference between a batch and an interactive job
Identify the stages of a batch job
Execute the command to display your jobs
Execute the command to display all active jobs
Explain how to control jobs on the system
Execute the command to view your spool files
Control printer output on the system
Perform all of these tasks through a display session as well as
using System i Navigator and Systems Director Navigator for i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-1. Unit objectives

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-3

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-4

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 8.1: Managing your work


through a display session

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 8-2. Topic 8.1: Managing your work through a display session

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-5

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-6

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Types of work on the system


IBM i

Interactive processing:
Requires continual two-way communication between the
user and the system.
The system occasionally requires information from the
user.
Both the user and the display station are free to do other
work

Batch processing:
Requires that information is sent for processing.
No further communication is required once processing is
started
Both the user and the display station are free to do other
work

Any work done by the System is referred to as a job.


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-3. Types of work on the system

OE9810.0

Notes:
Interactive processing occurs when you sign on the IBM i and then use commands and
menus to interact with the system.
An example of batch processing is perhaps a weekly or monthly report you request from
one of your application menus. Once you have made the request, you and your display
station are free to do other things. Your request is sent to another part of the system, and
here your report is generated with no further input from you.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-7

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-8

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Batch jobs
IBM i

2) John's request is
placed on a JOBQ.

4) Johns OUTQ has the


data to be printed,
known as Spool files.

Batch processing
3) Job is active.

John's
Spool
Files

Cans
writer

1) User John starts a


batch job called
PAYDAY.

CANS

5) Cans Writer must be


started before Johns
spool files will print.
STRPRTWTR

John's
printer
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-4. Batch jobs

OE9810.0

Notes:
Understanding the various stages that a batch job follows as it progresses from initial
submission to final completion can help you keep track of your work and ensure that it
completes as desired. The diagram displayed is a humorous representation of how batch
jobs flow through the system. It identifies the many stages that a batch job follows.
1. The user, John, selects an option from an application menu or runs the SBMJOB
command which submits a request to run program PAYDAY in batch mode.
2. First, John's request is placed on a Job Queue where it may have to wait its turn, along
with other jobs, before being executed. Queuing jobs such like this avoids overloading
system resources with too much work at one time. Jobs are taken off the queue, usually
one at a time, to be executed.
3. When John's job is taken off the queue, it will become active. Active jobs run under the
control of a subsystem which in turn controls the job's performance attributes.
4. When execution of the job is complete, John's job will likely generate some output
which will be in the form of spool files. Spool files created by jobs are placed on an
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-9

Instructor Guide

output queue. These spool files will wait in the output queue along with other print jobs,
until they are sent to a print device for printing.
5. A process known as a spool writer will eventually take John's spool file off of the output
queue and send it to a printer to be printed.
Note to Administrators:
When the System is IPLed, many subsystems are started by default and a ready-to-use
interactive and batch processing environment is enabled.
- The QINTER subsystem is started and sends a sign-on screen to all active
workstations thereby enabling interactive processing.
- The QBATCH subsystem is started and monitors IBM-supplied job queue QBATCH
(the default job queue used by the SBMJOB command) for new jobs. The QBATCH
subsystem takes jobs off of the job queue QBATCH, one at a time and executes
them.
Because interactive and batch jobs have different processing characteristics, there is a
different subsystem for the different types of jobs.
It is the subsystem description that dictates the performance values such as run priority,
timeslice, and memory allocation.
You can create your own subsystem descriptions thereby tailoring the job environment
to meet your own processing requirements as necessary.

8-10 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-11

Instructor Guide

Work with User Jobs


IBM i

Screen displayed with


the command
WRKUSRJOB
(Work user job)

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-5. Work with User Jobs

OE9810.0

Notes:
This screen is displayed by the work with users jobs command WRKUSRJOB.
From this display, you can determine is the current stage of your jobs. The various stages
for your batch jobs are:
Waiting to run: The job is still waiting on the job queue.
Running: The job has been taken off the job queue and is currently active in a
subsystem.
Output queue: The job has completed execution and has spool files on an output queue
waiting to print.
You can also determine if a job is not progressing through the various job stages. There are
different options (actions) that you can take for your job. These options are described on
the next visual.

8-12 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-13

Instructor Guide

Work with user job options


IBM i

Allow you to:

Batch processing

3 = Hold

Temporarily stop a job from running.

4 = Delete (End)

End or cancel a job on the system.

6 = Release

Release a job that has been held.

7 = Display message

Display and reply to any messages for your job that


may be pending.

8 = Work spooled files

Work with any output (reports) created by a


particular job.

John's
Spool
Files

Output
Queue
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-6. Work with user job options

OE9810.0

Notes:
Some of these options are pretty straight forward and do not require a lot of explanation
while other options may not be as straight forward. Remember to use the F1 = Help key in
the options column if you are not sure what an option does for you.
Option 3: You can place your job on hold
Option 6: Use this option to release a job that is on hold
Option 7: Use this option to reply to any messages that may be pending for a job
Option 4: Use this option to end or cancel you job. Be sure that you understand the
consequences of canceling a job. It is recommended that you check with your system
administrator before a job is canceled.
Option 5: Use this option to display all of the characteristic for your job. Selecting this
option will present you with a menu that has many different options to tell you
everything about your job.
Option 2: Use this option to make a change to any of the characteristics for your job

8-14 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Option 8: Use this option to work with any spooled files that were generated by your job
Note to Administrators:
Users with *JOBCTL special authority assigned to their user profile can control all user
jobs on the system.
The CL commands used to monitor and control all user jobs include:
- WRKJOBQ: Control batch jobs on a particular job queue.
- WRKACTJOB: Control all types of jobs that are currently active.
- WRKUSRJOB: Provides many parameters that you can use to obtain various job
views. For example, using this command, you can choose to work with only active
interactive jobs or perhaps instead only batch jobs submitted by a particular user
currently on a job queue.
- Remember to use F4, prompting, with these commands to fill in the parameters and
control what information will be displayed

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-15

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-16 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Controlling Printer Output


IBM i

Select option 1 from the


Operational Assistant menu.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-7. Controlling Printer Output

OE9810.0

Notes:
There are two ways to see the display in the visual:
Select option 1 from the Operational Assistant menu to see the Work with Printer
Output display.
Enter the work with spool files command WRKSPLF (covered on the next page in
student guide)
This display shows your printer output, known as spool files, and their status.
Your spool files are located in an Output Queues. If you recall, it is the Spool Writer process
that takes spool files from an output queue and sends them to a print device for printing. It
is possible that your spool files are on an output queue that is not currently associated with
a printer, that is a spool writer has not been started for that output queue. If this is the case,
your spool file will have a status 'Not assigned to a printer' and you must select Option 2 to
change your spool file and move it to a queue for which an active spool writer is started.
Your spooling environment is one of the things that is set up by your system administrator.
Ask your system administrator or system operator which output queues are associated with
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-17

Instructor Guide

which printers and select Option 2 to change your spool files to the appropriate output
queues.
From this display, you can press the F22 key to check the status of the spool writers on
your system and start spool writers if required. Usually, the function of starting and
controlling spool writers, however, is the task of the system operator.
Note to Administrators:
Users with *JOBCTL special authority can control all users' spooled output as well as
spool writers.
Commands to monitor and control the printing environment include:
- WRKSPLF: The easiest way to find your spool files
- WRKOUTQ: Monitor and control spool files on a particular output queue
- WRKJOB, WRKUSRJOB, and WRKACTJOB: Find and control spool files on a
job-by-job basis
- STRPRTWTR: Start the spool writer for a particular print device and a particular
output queue
- WRKWTR: Monitor and control all spool writers; from here, you can also start or
stop a writer

8-18 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-19

Instructor Guide

Controlling printer output with WRKSPLF


IBM i

Enter WRKSPLF command


and select Intermediate
Assistance Level (F21).

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-8. Controlling printer output with WRKSPLF

OE9810.0

Notes:
The WRKSPLF command can be used in place of Operational Assistant Option 1. If you
have proper authority to this command, you will find it quite useful for viewing and printing
just YOUR spool file.
As indicated before, the system can be running many jobs at the same time. The
WRKSPLF command looks only at your jobs (so long as you stay signed on), thus it might
be quicker to use than the options off of the Operational Assistant menus.
Selecting Option 4 from the Work with Job display will find your spool files, and from here,
you have much the same control as the Operational Assistant menu can provide.

8-20 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-21

Instructor Guide

Change a spool file


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-9. Change a spool file

OE9810.0

Notes:
These are two of three screens (the user values) that are presented when you select the
option for Change on the previous page. These are parameters you will see via all three of
the interfaces discussed in this class.
Some of the parameters you might be interested in changing are:
Printer (DEV): Specifies the printer that is used to print the file.
Copies (COPIES): Specifies, for spooled output only, the number of copies of the output
being printed.
Press the F10, additional parameters, and page down to see:
Output queue (OUTQ): Specifies the output queue to which the spooled file is moved.
This parameter is used only when the specified file is moved from one output queue to
another.
Expiration date for file (EXPDATE): Specifies the expiration date for the spooled file.
The spooled file will expire at 23:59:59, system local time on the date specified.

8-22 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Days until file expires (DAYS): Specifies the number of days to keep the spooled file.
Notice that there are other parameters on these three screens that you can also change. If
any of those are of interest place the cursor on that line and press the F1, Help key, to see
an explanation of what these other parameters can do for you.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-23

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-24 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Topic 8.2: Managing work through


System i Navigator

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 8-10. Topic 8.2: Managing work through System i Navigator

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-25

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-26 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Basic Operations: Jobs


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-11. Basic Operations: Jobs

OE9810.0

Notes:
Selecting Basic Operations > Jobs will display the jobs for the current user. This is
equivalent to running the Work with user jobs (WRKUSRJOB) command.
When you right click on your job, notice the actions that you are allowed to take against
your job.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-27

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-28 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Work Management: Active Jobs


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-12. Work Management: Active Jobs

OE9810.0

Notes:
Selecting Work Management > Active Jobs will display all active jobs on the system. This
is equivalent to running the Work active jobs (WRKACTJOB) command.
When you right click on your job, notice the actions that you are allowed to take against
your job.
Note to Administrators:
Those users who have the special authority of job control (*JOBCTL) in their profile, they
will be able to control other users jobs.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-29

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-30 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Active Jobs: Customize and Include


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-13. Active Jobs: Customize and Include

OE9810.0

Notes:
You can customize or filter which Active Jobs will display. To customize this function,
right-click Active Jobs > Customize this view > Include to see the panel in the lower
right.
You can use the Include dialog to limit the list of active jobs displayed in the Navigator
window to those that meet the criteria you specify. For example, you can include all jobs
started under a particular user. This is a tool you could use to more quickly and efficiently
find the jobs that are of interest to you.
The Include criteria that you could use to more quickly and effectively find jobs are the
Name, User, Number, and Subsystem parameters. Specifying Type, Current user, and
multiple Subsystem does not have as large an effect, but is still much better performing
than displaying all active jobs on the system.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-31

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-32 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Basic Operations: Printers


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-14. Basic Operations: Printers

OE9810.0

Notes:
From System i Navigator you can display a list of printers that are currently configured on
your system.
From the list of printers, you can start a printer, stop a printer, reply to a message that the
printer is waiting on, hold a printer, release a printer, restart a printer, and display the
properties of a printer. You can hold, release, and manage output queues and printer
writers that are associated with a selected printer. You can also start or stop a printer writer,
and you can make printer devices available (vary on) or unavailable (vary off).
You can also further customize what this window will display;
Using the F11, Include function you can customize the list to specify which printers you
want to include in the list. For example, you can specify the name of a printer or you can
select from a list of printers.
Using the F12, Columns function you can also specify which columns of information you
want to display in the list and in what order you want the columns to be displayed.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-33

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-34 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Basic Operations: Printer Output


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-15. Basic Operations: Printer Output

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-35

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-36 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Open a spool file


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-16. Open a spool file

OE9810.0

Notes:
You can open Spool files, which is system generated output (a system report), to view it in
a PC window.
Once the data is displayed in a PC window then it is possible to click File-Print or Ctrl-P
to print on your PC attached printer.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-37

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-38 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Spool file: Properties


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-17. Spool file: Properties

OE9810.0

Notes:
Using the Properties dialog will allow you to change all of the attributes associated with
your spooled files.
Some of the parameters you might be interested in changing are:
Printer: Specifies the printer that is used to print the file.
Output queue: Specifies the output queue to which the spooled file is moved. This
parameter is used only when the specified file is moved from one output queue to
another.
Total copies to print: Specifies, for spooled output only, the number of copies of the
output being printed.
Expiration: Specifies the expiration date for the spooled file. The spooled file will expire
at 23:59:59, system local time on the date specified. You can specify the number of
days to keep the spooled file.
Note: To actually remove the spooled files off of your system the Delete Expired Spooled
Files (DLTEXPSPLF) command has to be run. This is a command that can run from the
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-39

Instructor Guide

command line or that you add to a scheduler. This is the command that actually removes
expired spooled files on the system once the expiration date has been reached.
Remember to use the help facilities for any parameters that you may not be familiar with or
that may interest you.

8-40 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-41

Instructor Guide

Spool file: Move


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-18. Spool file: Move

OE9810.0

Notes:
The move function allows you to move your spooled file and specify either a different
output queue or to a printer that has a printer writer started. Note that the both of these
parameters allow you to browse and choose off of a list.

8-42 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-43

Instructor Guide

Spool file: Copy and paste


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-19. Spool file: Copy and paste

OE9810.0

Notes:
Another option available for your spooled files is the copy and paste capability.
1. First you can click and expand the printer output function.
2. Next, locate and right click your spooled file and select Copy on the pop up menu.
3. Then expand the Printers function to see a listing of the printers defined on your
system.
4. Lastly, locate and right click the target printer and select Paste on the pop up menu.

8-44 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-45

Instructor Guide

Spool file: Drag and drop


IBM i

Drag and drop is supported


Locate and click spooled file = Move function
Drop onto a printer = Move function
Drop onto the desktop = Download to PC and
convert to PC .TXT file
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-20. Spool file: Drag and drop

OE9810.0

Notes:
The Drag and drop function is also supported by this GUI.
Once you locate your spooled file you can click and drag and drop it onto either:
A printer that has a writer started
The PC desktop. This will download and convert this into a .txt type file. If this were a
joblog, this txt file could now be emailed to your technical support personnel.

8-46 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-47

Instructor Guide

Topic 8.3: Managing work through


Systems Director Navigator for i

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 8-21. Topic 8.3: Managing work through Systems Director Navigator for i

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

8-48 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-49

Instructor Guide

Basic Operations: User Jobs


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-22. Basic Operations: User Jobs

OE9810.0

Notes:
To display the Web pages in the visual:
1. Open a Web browser
2. Connect to your system
3. Click and open the Basic Operations page
4. Click and open User Jobs to see the Web page in the lower right in the visual. This is
equivalent to running the Work with user jobs (WRKUSRJOB) command.
5. Click the twistie next to your job to show the pop up menus displayed on the visual,
notice the actions that you are allowed to take against your job.

8-50 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-51

Instructor Guide

Work Management: Active Jobs


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-23. Work Management: Active Jobs

OE9810.0

Notes:
To display the Web pages in the visual:
1. Click and open the Work management page.
2. Click and open Active Jobs to see the Web page in the lower right in the visual. This is
equivalent to running the Work with active jobs (WRKACTJOB) command.
3. Click the twistie next to your job to show the pop up menus displayed on the visual,
notice the actions that you are allowed to take against your job.
Note to Administrators:
Those users who have the special authority of job control (*JOBCTL) in their profile, they
will be able to control other users jobs.

8-52 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-53

Instructor Guide

Active Jobs: Customize and include


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-24. Active Jobs: Customize and include

OE9810.0

Notes:
You can customize or filter which Active Jobs will display. To customize this function, click
the down arrow for the Select action parameter to click Include to see the panel in the
lower right.
You can use the Include dialog to limit the list of active jobs displayed in the Navigator
window to those that meet the criteria you specify. For example, you can include all jobs
started under a particular user. This is a tool you could use to more quickly and efficiently
find the jobs that are of interest to you.
The Include criteria that you could use to more quickly and effectively find jobs are the
Name, User, Number, and Subsystem parameters. Specifying Type, Current user, and
multiple Subsystem does not have as large an effect, but is still much better performing
than displaying all active jobs on the system.

8-54 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-55

Instructor Guide

Basic Operations: Printers


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-25. Basic Operations: Printers

OE9810.0

Notes:
From System Director Navigator for i you can display a list of printers that are currently
configured on your system. To display the Web pages in the visual:
1. Click and open the Basic operations page.
2. Click and open Printers to see the Web page in the lower right in the visual. This is
equivalent to running the Work with writers (WRKWTR) command.
3. Click the twistie next to your printer to show the pop up menus displayed on the visual,
notice the actions that you are allowed to take against your printer.
Notice the action you take for your printers when you click the twistie to open the pop up
menu.
You can also further customize what this Web page will display, click the down arrow for
Select action and choose one of the following:
Using the Include function you can customize the list to specify which printers you want
to include in the list. For example, you can specify the name of a printer or you can
select from a list of printers.
8-56 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Using the Columns function you can also specify which columns of information you
want to display in the list and in what order you want the columns to be displayed.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-57

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-58 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Basic Operations: Printer Output


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-26. Basic Operations: Printer Output

OE9810.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-59

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-60 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Open a spool file


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-27. Open a spool file

OE9810.0

Notes:
You can open Spool files, which is system generated output (a system report), to view it in
a PC window.
Once the data is displayed in a PC window then it is possible to click File-Print or Ctrl-P
to print on your PC attached printer.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-61

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

8-62 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Spool file: Properties


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-28. Spool file: Properties

OE9810.0

Notes:
Using the Properties page will allow you to change all of the attributes associated with your
spooled files.
Some of the parameters you might be interested in changing are:
Printer: Specifies the printer that is used to print the file.
Output queue: Specifies the output queue to which the spooled file is moved. This
parameter is used only when the specified file is moved from one output queue to
another.
Total copies to print: Specifies, for spooled output only, the number of copies of the
output being printed.
Expiration: Specifies the expiration date for the spooled file. The spooled file will expire
at 23:59:59 on the date specified. You can specify the number of days to keep the
spooled file.
Note: To actually remove the spooled files off of your system the Delete Expired Spooled
Files (DLTEXPSPLF) command has to be run. This is a command that can run from the
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-63

Instructor Guide

command line or that you add to a scheduler. This is the command that actually removes
expired spooled files on the system once the expiration date has been reached.
Remember to use the question mark (?) help facilities for any parameters that you may not
be familiar with or that may interest you.

8-64 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-65

Instructor Guide

Spool file: Move


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-29. Spool file: Move

OE9810.0

Notes:
The move function allows you to move your spooled file and specify either a different
output queue or to a printer that has a printer writer started. Note that the both of these
parameters allow you to browse and choose off of a list.

8-66 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-67

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. Once a batch job has been submitted to the system, it will


not require any more input from the operator.
a. True
b. False

2. Which of the following commands cannot be used for job


control?
a. WRKUSRJOB
b. WRKACTJOB
c. WRKSPLFIL
d. WRKJOBQ

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-30. Checkpoint (1 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

8-68 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. Once a batch job has been submitted to the system, it will


not require any more input from the operator.
a. True
b. False

2. Which of the following commands cannot be used for job


control?
a. WRKUSRJOB
b. WRKACTJOB
c. WRKSPLFIL
d. WRKJOBQ

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-69

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (2 of 3)
IBM i

3. WRKWTR and STRPRTWTR perform the same function.


a. True
b. False

4. You can use System i Navigator to manage print spools.


a. True
b. False

5. The WRKUSR job command will show all of the active jobs on
the system.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-31. Checkpoint (2 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

8-70 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 3)
IBM i

3. WRKWTR and STRPRTWTR perform the same function.


a. True
b. False

4. You can use System i Navigator to manage print spools.


a. True
b. False

5. The WRKUSR job command will show all of the active jobs on
the system.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-71

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (3 of 3)
IBM i

6. The WRKACTJOB job command will show only your active


jobs.
a. True
b. False

7. The contents of a spool file (the actual report itself) can be


viewed with which of the following?
a. Display session
b. System i Navigator window
c. Systems Director Navigator for i
d. All of the above
e. Two of the above

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-32. Checkpoint (3 of 3)

OE9810.0

Notes:

8-72 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (3 of 3)
IBM i

6. The WRKACTJOB job command will show only your active


jobs.
a. True
b. False

7. The contents of a spool file (the actual report itself) can be


viewed with which of the following?
a. Display session
b. System i Navigator window
c. Systems Director Navigator for i
d. All of the above
e. Two of the above

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-73

Instructor Guide

Exercise 5: Tracking jobs and printouts


IBM i

Exercise time

Please complete
Exercise 5
Tracking jobs and
printouts

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-33. Exercise 5: Tracking jobs and printouts

OE9810.0

Notes:
In this lab you will submit a program to run in batch mode using a display session.
In previous labs you learned how to Run a command using the System i Navigator and the
Systems Director Navigator for i. Since that was already covered in a previous lab, we will
not be covering those steps again in this lab.

8-74 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-75

Instructor Guide

Unit summary
IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:


List the types of jobs that can run on the system
Describe the difference between a batch and an interactive job
Identify the stages of a batch job
Execute the command to display your jobs
Execute the command to display all active jobs
Explain how to control jobs on the system
Execute the command to view your spool files
Control printer output on the system
Perform all of these tasks through a display session as well as
using System i Navigator and Systems Director Navigator for i
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 8-34. Unit summary

OE9810.0

Notes:

8-76 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 8. Managing your work

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-77

Instructor Guide

8-78 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit 9. Security overview


Estimated time
00:30

What this unit is about


It is helpful to have a basic understanding of how security works on the
IBM i, even if your responsibilities do not include the maintenance of
security on the system. This understanding will enable you to make
recommendations on how security should be defined for objects you
are responsible for on your job.

What you should be able to do


After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Explain what authority can be specified for an object
Describe the tools used to secure your system
List some of the information stored in a user profile
List the user classes that can be created on the system
Describe the different assistance levels that can be specified
Explain how to change your password

How You Will Check Your Progress


Checkpoint questions

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-1

Instructor Guide

Unit objectives
IBM i

After completing this unit, you should be able to:


Explain what authority can be specified for an object
Describe the tools used to secure your system
List some of the information stored in a user profile
List the user classes that can be created on the system
Describe the different assistance levels that can be specified
Explain how to change your password

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-1. Unit objectives

OE9810.0

Notes:

9-2

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-3

Instructor Guide

Topic 9.1: Security concepts

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 9-2. Topic 9.1: Security concepts

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

9-4

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-5

Instructor Guide

System tools used to secure your system


IBM i

Security level
System values
User profiles
Groups profiles
Object / resource security
Security auditing

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-3. System tools used to secure your system

OE9810.0

Notes:
Security Level: The level of security at which the system runs. There are five levels of
security that can be set with the QSECURITY system value.
System Values: Allow you to define system wide security settings and to provide
customization for many characteristics of your IBM i.
User Profiles: The user profile is powerful and flexible tool used to control what the user
can do and customize the way the system appears to that user.
Groups Profiles: A group profile is a special type of user profile. Rather than giving
authority to each user individually, you can use a group profile to define authority for a
group of users.
Resource Security: The ability to access an object is called authority. Resource security
on the IBM i operating system enables you to control object authorities by defining who can
use which objects and how those objects can be used.
Security Audit Journal: The IBM i operating system provides the ability to log selected
security-related events in a security audit journal.
9-6

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-7

Instructor Guide

User profile
IBM i

An object that stores user info, such as:


User ID and password
What class of user you are
Initial menu and current library
What assistance level is default

Mary Smith
Programmer

Lists any additional system


privileges that may be assigned
Identifies characteristics for work initiated by the user
Controls what the user is allowed to do after signing on
They are used to identify the users jobs and printer output.
Contains information about the objects owned by the user
Contains information about private authorities to objects
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-4. User profile

OE9810.0

Notes:
Your user profile is created by the security officer or someone with the same level of
security.
User profiles are used to identify the user, to identify what the user can do, how and where
user jobs will run. It also defines if any additional system privileges are assigned to a
profile, above what is normally assigned based on the user class. Basically it is used to
identify who are the users allowed to sign on the system and what can they do once they
are signed on.
It contains various pieces of information regarding which resources you have been given
permission to use and what system functions you can perform. In addition, the menu
displayed when you sign in is also set in your user profile.
Note to Administrators:
The key parameter in the CRTUSRPRF command is user class, which dictates a user's
special authorities.

9-8

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Examples of user class include *SECOFR (all special authorities are provided) and
*SYSOPR (special authorities applicable to system operators are provided).
Examples of special authorities include *JOBCTL (this user can control all users' jobs)
and *SECADM (this user can create and change user profiles).
The user profile specifies security attributes as well as job environment attributes (that is,
current library, initial menu, default printer) for a user.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-9

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

9-10 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

User classes and what they can do


IBM i

User classes that can be defined


Special
Authority

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-5. User classes and what they can do

OE9810.0

Notes:
The table shows the User classes (the different types of users) available on the system.
Each class has a default set of system privileges or authorities. The authorities specified
under System privileges override the default privileges for this user or group. When you are
working with a group, the privileges specified apply to all users who are members of that
group.
The different types of users (the user class) that can be defined on the system are:
User: The user does not get any privileges on systems that are security level 30 or
higher. The user's default privileges are save/restore and all object access on systems
that are at security levels 10 and 20.
Programmer: The user does not get any privileges on systems that are security level
30 or higher. The user's default privileges are save/restore, job control, and all object
access on systems that are at security levels 10 and 20.
System operator: The user's default privileges are save/restore and job control on
systems that are security level 30 or higher. The user's default privileges are
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-11

Instructor Guide

save/restore, job control, and all object access on systems that are at security levels 10
and 20.
Security administrator: The user's special authority is security administration on
systems that are security level 30 or higher. The user's default privileges are
save/restore, job control, security administration, and all object access on systems that
are at security levels 10 and 20.
Security officer: The user's default privileges are all object access, save/restore,
auditing control, security administration, system configuration, system service access,
job control, and spool control.
Note:
The security level that is recommended is level 40. Systems ship with level 40 security set
as the default.

9-12 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-13

Instructor Guide

Assistance levels
IBM i

The IBM i operating system allows you to choose the amount


of assistance you want to receive in your interaction with the
system.
The difference between the assistance levels is in the number
and complexity of the menus and displays that you see.
This is one of the values controlled through a user profile.
The operating system provides three assistance levels:
Basic

- For new users, easy-to-understand

Intermediate

- Uses computer terminology and allows


complex task to be performed

Advanced

- Assumes you are experienced and less


assistance given
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-6. Assistance levels

OE9810.0

Notes:
Two users can enter the very same command, such as the WRKSPLF command, but
receive two very different displays as a result of the assistance level in their respective user
profiles. A basic user will receive a display appropriate for a user with little system
experience while an intermediate user will receive a more complex display.
Basic Assistance Level: The basic assistance level uses the types of displays that have
the most assistance available. This is the recommended level for new end users. It
supports the most commonly used tasks in easy-to-understand terminology.

9-14 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-15

Instructor Guide

What authorization can be specified for an object?


IBM i

Use:
The user can use the object, but
cannot change it.

SECRET

OBJECT
authorization

Change:
The user can use the object and
change the content.

All:
The user can use the object, change
its content, and delete the object or
change the authorization for the object.

All

Exclude:

OBJECT
authorization

The user is prevented from accessing


the object.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-7. What authorization can be specified for an object?

OE9810.0

Notes:
One way to control the security on your System is to control who the users are and what
they can do on the system. Another way to control security is to secure each object on the
system. Using Resource security, also called Object security, you can control who is
authorized to access an object and what can they do with that object.
Note to Administrators:
Use the EDTOBJAUT command to specify user authorizations for a particular object.
User profiles of security class *SECOFR are given by default special authority *ALLOBJ
which means they have access to all objects on the system.
The default authority for users who are not explicitly given authority to an object is
known as an object's 'public' authority which is set at object creation time.
To ease the administration of object authorizations, use:
- Limited capability users who are restricted to specific menus and from most
commands.

9-16 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

- Group profiles: Give multiple users authority to an object in one step.


- Restrict users from the library and they will be restricted from objects in that library.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-17

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

9-18 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Where is object authorization specified?


IBM i

Public authority
can be specified:
a. In the object's
definition

Public

OBJECT
authorization

Private authority can be specified:


a. In the
user profile
for each user, OR

Mary Smith
Programmer

b. In a
group profile
for many users, OR

Same authorities using


the same objects

c. In an
authorization list
for many users
with different
authorization

Use
Change
All
Exclude

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-8. Where is object authorization specified?

OE9810.0

Notes:
In the command used to create an object, one of the parameters defines what authority the
public will be granted to this object. As soon as a new user is created on the system, that
user becomes a member of Public.
To set resource security, a system administrator or a security officer can run a command to
allow a user to access and object and specify exactly what authority or permission that user
ill have to that object.
Group profiles are used to quickly and easily set security on the system. An administrator
can set up resource security and assign those permissions to a group profile. Then you will
specify which users belong to that group. Then you can add or remove authorities at the
group level and they will flow down to all of the members who belong to that group.
Another way to implement resource security is using an authorization list. First an
administrator will create an authorization list. Next the user will add users to this
authorization list. For each user you will specify what authority that user will have to each
and all of the objects that are secured by this authorization list. Lastly, each object is now

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-19

Instructor Guide

assigned to be secured by this authorization list. An object can only be secured by one
authorization list.
Note to Administrators:
Public authority refers to the default level of access for users who are not explicitly
authorized to an object. This is set at object creation time using the AUT parameter on
most create object commands.

9-20 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-21

Instructor Guide

Topic 9.2: Security changes


a user can make

Powertm with IBM i


Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Figure 9-9. Topic 9.2: Security changes a user can make

5.4

OE9810.0

Notes:

9-22 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-23

Instructor Guide

Changing your password


IBM i

Mary Smith
Programmer

It's a good idea to


write your password
Down. Make sure no one
knows where to find it.

From the operational Assistant menu select option


Type current password : OE98PWD
(The password does not show up on the screen).
Press Field Exit.
Type your new password.
Press Field Exit.
Type your new password.
Press Enter.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010
Figure 9-10. Changing your password

OE9810.0

Notes:
The change password (CHGPWD) command is used to change your password. This is a
command that an end user can call from the command line.
The most common way that an end user will change their password will be at sign-on time.
By setting a system value the security officer can set up your system so that passwords
expire after a certain time period, for example users must change their passwords every 30
or 60 days. When this time is reached the passwords go to an expired status, at the next
sign-on users are prompted to change their passwords.
Note to Administrators:
WRKSYSVAL *SEC shows all security-related system values.
System values are global-wide values applicable to all users.
Here a couple of examples of system values that relate to security:
- Password will expire after x number of days (QPWDEXPUTV)

9-24 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

- The minimum number of characters that can be specified for a password


(QPWDMINLEN)
- The maximum number of characters that can be specified for a password
(QPWDMAXLEN)
- The number of times a user can type in the wrong password before that user's user
profile is disabled (QMAXSIGN)
- When passwords will expire (QPWDEXPITV).

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-25

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

9-26 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Changing your profile


IBM i

On any command line, type CHGPRF and press F4.


Type your user profile name in the User profile prompt.
Press Enter.
Mary Smith
Programmer

Press the Tab key to move your cursor to the Assistance level prompt.
Type the assistance level of your choice:
(*BASIC , *INTERMED or *ADVANCED)
Press Enter.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-11. Changing your profile

OE9810.0

Notes:
Depending on your class of user, that will determine what authority or permissions you
have and what you can change in your profile. The user profiles for this class, OE98xx are
set up as a class of User. A user profile that has a class of User can run the change
profile command and is very limited in what you can change on the system.
The CHGPRF command can only be run from a display session, there is no equivalent that
can be run via GUI. The only alternative via GUI is to submit via the Run a command
function that was addressed earlier in class.
There are multiple ways to set assistance level on the system:
1. This user can run the change profile (CHGPRF) command but you are very limited in
what you can change. You can set the level of assistance you receive when interacting
with the system. The default assistance level will then be applied to all displays
presented by the system.
2. A way to temporarily change the assistance level is available when you use individual
commands to display work with screens, these are the commands that begin with
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-27

Instructor Guide

WRK. Once the command is processed and you are looking at the screen it
generated, you can toggle between assistance levels using the F21 key.
3. When you run a specific command, prompt the command and look for the assistance
level parameter so that you can set how the system should display the requested
information. The last assistance level you requested for a particular command is
remembered by the system. This assistance level is used the next time you enter that
command. Not all commands have different assistant levels. Commands that perform
various system operations, such as managing printed output, jobs, and devices have
assistance levels available.
You can also change your initial menu when using the CHGPRF command. This is one of
the parameters that can be locked by a security officer, so depending on how your System
is defined this may or may not be one of the changes you are allowed to make.
Note to Administrators:
GO CMDUSPRF provides all user profile commands including CHGUSRPRF, which
security administrators use to change user profiles.
CRTUSRPRF parameter Limited Capabilities = *yes prevents users from changing
their initial menu and program at the sign-on screen or with the CHPRF command. Also,
these users are by default allowed to run very few CL commands. Hence, you can
isolate users into specific application environments.

9-28 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-29

Instructor Guide

Assistance level parameter


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-12. Assistance level parameter

OE9810.0

Notes:
When you are running an individual command, you can prompt the command using the F4
key.
Once on the prompt screen then press the F10, additional parameters key to see the
Assistance level parameter.
When you specify this parameter it will override what has been specified in the user profile
for assistance level.

9-30 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-31

Instructor Guide

Connection to server: Change Password


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-13. Connection to server: Change Password

OE9810.0

Notes:
To change your password using this GUI you would:
Open System i Navigator
Click and sign-on to your system
Right click on your system
Choose Connect to Server > Change password on the pop up menus
Enter you current password followed by the new password, remember to adhere to the
password rules set by your system administrator.
Click OK
System i Navigator does not provide an option to CHGPRF. That is a command that can
only be run from the command line or submitted via the Run a command function.

9-32 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-33

Instructor Guide

System tasks: Change Password


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-14. System tasks: Change Password

OE9810.0

Notes:
To change your password using this GUI you would:
Open a browser window and start connection to system with Systems Director
Navigator for i
Click and expand the System link
Click the Change password link to see page in lower right
Notice that this GUI provides more options of values that can be changed than the
previous two interfaces. Assuming you had the correct class of user profile there is even
a button to make changes to password system values; this would make changes
effective for the entire system as opposed to just one user profile.
Click OK when you are done making the required changes.

9-34 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-35

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM i

1. Which of the following is a true statement regarding user


profiles?
a. Each profile can have a unique main menu
b. Determines what resources are owned by the profile
c. Has the ability to dictate special authorities to each user
d. All the above
e. None of the above

2. Once your profile has been created, you cannot change


assistance levels.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-15. Checkpoint (1 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:

9-36 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2)
IBM i

1. Which of the following is a true statement regarding user


profiles?
a. Each profile can have a unique main menu
b. Determines what resources are owned by the profile
c. Has the ability to dictate special authorities to each user
d. All the above
e. None of the above

2. Once your profile has been created, you cannot change


assistance levels.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-37

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM i

3. The CHGPRF (change profile) command can be run from any


of the interfaces covered in lecture.
a. True
b. False

4. System i Navigator can be used to change the password for


a user profile.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-16. Checkpoint (2 of 2)

OE9810.0

Notes:

9-38 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2)
IBM i

3. The CHGPRF (change profile) command can be run from any


of the interfaces covered in lecture.
a. True
b. False

4. System i Navigator can be used to change the password for


a user profile.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-39

Instructor Guide

Unit summary
IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:


Explain what authority can be specified for an object
Describe the tools used to secure your system
List some of the information stored in a user profile
List the user classes that can be created on the system
Describe the different assistance levels that can be specified
Explain how to change your password

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 9-17. Unit summary

OE9810.0

Notes:

9-40 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 9. Security overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-41

Instructor Guide

9-42 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Unit 10. Additional education


Estimated time
00:10

What this unit is about


This unit describes the education that is available for the IBM i. Where
to find the information and how to use the roadmap is also covered.

What you should be able to do


After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Describe additional education courses for the IBM i.

How You Will Check Your Progress


Classroom discussion

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 10. Additional education

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

10-1

Instructor Guide

Unit objectives
IBM i

After completing this unit, you should be able to:


Describe additional educational courses for the IBM i.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 10-1. Unit objectives

OE9810.0

Notes:

10-2 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 10. Additional education

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

10-3

Instructor Guide

IBM Web site for education


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 10-2. IBM Web site for education

OE9810.0

Notes:
This site can be accessed from: http://www.ibm.com/services/learning
Select from any of the three choices:
Training in the United States
Browse for training by country
Conferences and events

10-4 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 10. Additional education

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

10-5

Instructor Guide

Power Systems Education


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 10-3. Power Systems Education

OE9810.0

Notes:
The URL for this Web page is: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/power/education/

10-6 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 10. Additional education

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

10-7

Instructor Guide

IBM i Training paths


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 10-4. IBM i Training paths

OE9810.0

Notes:

10-8 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 10. Additional education

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

10-9

Instructor Guide

IBM i system operator roadmap


IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 10-5. IBM i system operator roadmap

OE9810.0

Notes:
Notice that the roadmap covers not only classroom classes but also Instructor Led Online
(ILO) courses.

10-10 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 10. Additional education

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

10-11

Instructor Guide

Unit summary
IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:


Describe additional educational courses for the IBM i.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 10-6. Unit summary

OE9810.0

Notes:

10-12 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 10. Additional education

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

10-13

Instructor Guide

Class evaluation
IBM i

Please fill out Student Evaluation form.

Use class number ________

Use class number ________

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 10-7. Class evaluation

OE9810.0

Notes:

10-14 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 10. Additional education

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

10-15

Instructor Guide

Thank you
IBM i

IBM i

Thank You!
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Figure 10-8. Thank you

OE9810.0

Notes:

10-16 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Uempty

Instructor notes:
Purpose
Details
Additional information
Transition statement

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Unit 10. Additional education

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

10-17

Instructor Guide

10-18 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V4.1
Instructor Guide

AP

Appendix A. Menus for system operations


The following is a list of menus that are particularly useful in controlling and operating the
system. You can access any of these menus directly from any display having a command
line. Just type GO plus a menu ID from the following list:
ASSIST
The Operational Assistant (ASSIST) menu simplifies some of the common user tasks,
such as working with printer output, jobs, messages, and changing your password.
In addition, users with proper authority can select options to manage or customize the
system, check the system status, clean up objects, power the system on and off, enroll
users, change some system options, and collect disk space information.
BACKUP
The Backup Tasks (BACKUP) menu allows you to back up (save) the system and
initialize the tapes that are used during backup.
CLEANUP
The Cleanup (CLEANUP) menu allows you to start, end, or change automatic cleanup.
The cleanup function deletes old job logs, history logs, messages, office calendar items,
and journal receivers that take up storage space.
DEVICESTS
The Device Status (DEVICESTS) menu allows you to choose options for working with
system devices, such as display stations, printers, tape drives, and diskette drives.
FILE
The Files (FILE) menu allows you to work with files on the system.
FOLDER
The Folders (FOLDER) menu allows you to manage folders. Folders can be used to
store other folders and documents.
INFO
The Information Assistant* Options (INFO) menu allows you to find out where to look for
information about your IBM i system and how to comment on that information. You can
also use this menu to find out what is new in this release of the IBM i system and what
new enhancements and functions will be available in the next release.
LIBRARY
The Libraries (LIBRARY) menu allows you to work with libraries.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix A. Menus for system operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-1

Instructor Guide

MANAGESYS
The Manage Your System, Users, and Devices (MANAGESYS) menu allows you to
display what activity is occurring in the system, run backup, and work with the devices
on the system.
PROBLEM
The Problem Handling (PROBLEM) menu allows you to work with problems, ask
questions, and receive answers using the question and answer database, display
system operator messages, display the history log, and start system service tools
(SST).
RESTORE
The Restore (RESTORE) menu allows you to restore saved information from tape, or
save file (SAVF) on the system.
RUNBCKUP
On the Run a Backup (RUNBCKUP) menu, you can select a menu option to specify the
type of backup you want to run.
SETUP
The Customize Your System, Users, and Devices (SETUP) menu lets you customize
automatic cleanup, schedule when your system will power on and off, and enroll users.
SETUPBCKUP
The Set Up Backup (SETUPBCKUP) menu allows you to change backup options, lists,
and schedules.
STATUS
The Status (STATUS) menu allows you to display the status of jobs, devices, and
system activities.
SYSTEM
The General System Tasks (SYSTEM) menu allows you to control system operations,
devices, and all jobs on the system.
TAPE
The Tape (TAPE) menu allows you to use and control tape devices.
TECHHELP
The Technical Support Tasks (TECHHELP) menu provides options to help resolve
problems on the system.
USERHELP
The Information and Problem Handling (USERHELP) menu provides additional
information about the system and is useful in attempting to resolve problems.

A-2

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V4.1
Instructor Guide

AP

Appendix B. Commonly used commands


Command Name

Brief description

CRTLIB

Create a library.

DSPLIB

Display a library.

GO *ALL

List all menus for system commands.

GO ASSIST

Go to the operational assistant menu.

GO CMDJOB

Find all job commands.

Go CMDOUTQ

Find all out queue commands.

GO INFO

Go to the information assistant options menu.

GO MAIN

Go to the main menu.

GO PRINTER

Go to printer menu.

GO SUPPORT

Go to the support and education menu.

SIGNOFF

Sign you off the system.

SNDBRKMSG

Send break message.

SNDMSG

Send message.

STRPRTWTR

Start print writer.

WRKJOB

Work with job (your job).

WRKJOBQ

Work with job queues.

WRKOUTQ

Work with out queues.

WRKMSGQ

Work with message queues.

WRKSPLF

Work with spooled files.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix B. Commonly used commands

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

B-1

Instructor Guide

B-2

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

AP

Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions


Unit 1

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2)
IBM i

1. Which of the following is a resource for IBM i information?


a. Information Center
b. IBM i home page
c.

IBM i Redbooks Web page

d. All the above

2. Which of the following provide a user interface to the IBM


i?
a. 5250 emulation session
b. System i Navigator
c.

Systems Director Navigator for i

d. All the above


e. Only two of the above
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-1

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2)
IBM i

3. Which of the following is supported by IBM i?


a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Central site maintenance


DB2 support
Java
All the above
Only two of the above

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

C-2

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Unit 2

AP

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. To sign on to an IBM i using 5250 emulation, you will need a


user ID, password, and program ID.
a. True
b. False

2. It is possible to customize the main menu the user will see


when logging on to an IBM i.
a. True
b. False

3. Which keys on a PC keyboard can clear the "More" when it is


displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the screen?
a.
b.
c.
d.

Enter key
Ctrl key
Pause
PgUp or PgDn
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-3

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 3)
IBM i

4. Which of the following is a method to access Operational


Assistant?
a.
b.
c.
d.

Pressing the ESC key


Pressing the Ctrl Break key
Selecting option 80 on the menu screen
Typing "go assist" on the command line

5. You can use the same user ID and password to sign on to


System i Navigator that you use to sign on to a display
session on the same system.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

C-4

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

AP

Checkpoint solutions (3 of 3)
IBM i

6. You must make a choice to either sign on to the display


session or System i Navigator, since you cannot sign on to
both at the same time.
a. True
b. False

7. IBM Systems Director Navigator for i can be used to perform


which of the following tasks?
a.
b.
c.
d.

User
System operator
System administrator
All of the above

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-5

Instructor Guide

Unit 3

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2)
IBM i

1. You can prompt the system for possible choices by placing


the cursor somewhere within an entry field and pressing the
___ key.
a.
b.
c.
d.

F3
F4
F5
F6

2. Which assistance level will allow you job control and uses
computer jargon to communicate with you?
a. Assistance level 1
b. Assistance level 2

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

C-6

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

AP

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2)
IBM i

3. Using System request can start an alternate session at your


display station.
a. True
b. False

4. Using the include function, it is possible to specify what


information is to be displayed for a task using the GUI .
a. True
b. False

5. Using the include columns function, it is possible to choose


which columns of information and in what order they are
displayed in a 5250 green screen session.
a. True
b. False
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-7

Instructor Guide

Unit 4

Checkpoint solutions
IBM i

1. Which of the following are not a way you can access help on
a Display session?
a. Using F2
b. Using F1
c. Using F4
d. Using F12

2. Help screens are only available when using the Display


session interface.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

C-8

Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Unit 5

AP

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. Each user has a mailbox (a message queue) with the same


name as his or her user profile name.
a. True
b. False

2. Which message type has the highest priority?


a.
b.
c.
d.

Break
Informational
System
User

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-9

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 3)
IBM i

3. Which of the following is not a valid delivery mode for a


message?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Default
Notify
Hold
Break
System

4. When using System i Navigator, the message function is


found under what tab?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Work Management
Configuration and Service
Security
Basic Operations
Users and Groups
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

C-10 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

AP

Checkpoint solutions (3 of 3)
IBM i

5. Break messages can be sent to users signed on through one


of the graphical interfaces.
a. True
b. False

6. When using System i Navigator or Systems Director


Navigator for i, it is possible to display only your messages.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-11

Instructor Guide

Unit 6

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. What is the easiest way to find a command you need?


a. Press F1 on any screen.
b. Press F4 with the cursor on the command line.
c. Press F1 with the cursor on the command line.
d. Press F4 with the cursor in any position on the screen.
2. Some CL commands have default values for parameter entries.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

C-12 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

AP

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 3)
IBM i

3. Match the purpose of the function key with the correct key.
F1

1. Retrieve commands

F4

2. Help

F9

3. Provides assistance with commands

a. F1 = 2, F4 = 1, F9 = 3
b. F1 = 2, F4 = 3, F9 = 1
c. F1 = 3, F4 = 2, F9 = 1
d. F1 = 1, F4 = 3, F9 = 2

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-13

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint solutions (3 of 3)
IBM i

4. When using F4 for command assistance, all values are


displayed, including default values.
a. True
b. False

5. When using System i Navigator to run a command, you can


use F4 to display all the parameters.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

C-14 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Unit 7

AP

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. Which of the following is not an object on the IBM i?


a. Files
b. Programs
c. Commands
d. Record
e. Libraries

2. Which of the following is a valid use of a library?


a. A library is an object used to store applications.
b. A library is an object used to store production data.
c. A library is an object used to store security information.
d. All the above are valid use of a library.
e. None of the above is a valid use of a library.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-15

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 3)
IBM i

3. Each user can have a list of libraries assigned; this list can
be customized for each user.
a. True
b. False

4. Which of the following is a correct statement regarding a


library list?
a. The library list is only used to find application programs.
b. The library list is searched from the top to the bottom when
searching for an object.
c. A library list cannot be configured for a specific user.
d. Using the command DSPLIBL only shows IBM-supplied libraries.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

C-16 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

AP

Checkpoint solutions (3 of 3)
IBM i

5. When using the GUI, you can use the IFS as a way to find
objects on the system.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-17

Instructor Guide

Unit 8

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 3)
IBM i

1. Once a batch job has been submitted to the system, it will


not require any more input from the operator.
a. True
b. False

2. Which of the following commands cannot be used for job


control?
a. WRKUSRJOB
b. WRKACTJOB
c. WRKSPLFIL
d. WRKJOBQ

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

C-18 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

AP

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 3)
IBM i

3. WRKWTR and STRPRTWTR perform the same function.


a. True
b. False

4. You can use System i Navigator to manage print spools.


a. True
b. False

5. The WRKUSR job command will show all of the active jobs on
the system.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-19

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint solutions (3 of 3)
IBM i

6. The WRKACTJOB job command will show only your active


jobs.
a. True
b. False

7. The contents of a spool file (the actual report itself) can be


viewed with which of the following?
a. Display session
b. System i Navigator window
c. Systems Director Navigator for i
d. All of the above
e. Two of the above

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

C-20 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4
Instructor Guide

Unit9

AP

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2)
IBM i

1. Which of the following is a true statement regarding user


profiles?
a. Each profile can have a unique main menu
b. Determines what resources are owned by the profile
c. Has the ability to dictate special authorities to each user
d. All the above
e. None of the above

2. Once your profile has been created, you cannot change


assistance levels.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Appendix C. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-21

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2)
IBM i

3. The CHGPRF (change profile) command can be run from any


of the interfaces covered in lecture.
a. True
b. False

4. System i Navigator can be used to change the password for


a user profile.
a. True
b. False

Copyright IBM Corporation 2010

C-22 Introduction to IBM i for New Users

Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2010

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part


without the prior written permission of IBM.

V5.4

backpg

Back page

Potrebbero piacerti anche